1d109fa3a4f5c9b715c5214ef56168c6

Part : AB68-00393A(02)
Printed in China
SmartDome Camera
SCC-641(P)
E
D
F
Es
I
Owners Instructions
Benutzerhandbuch
Manuel dinstruction
Manual del usuario
Istruzioni per luso
E
Safety Precautions
The purpose of this information is to ensure proper use of this product to
prevent danger or damage to property. Please be sure to observe all
precautions.
* The precautions are divided into "Warnings" and "Cautions" as
distinguished below:
Warning: Ignoring this warning may result in death or serious injury.
Caution: Ignoring this caution may result in injury or damage to property.
Warning instructions alert you to
a potential risk of death
or serious injury.
Caution instructions alert you to the
potential risk of injury or
damage to property.
6. Do not place conductive objects (e.g., screwdrivers, coins, and metal
things) or containers filled with water on top of the camera. (Doing so may
cause personal injury due to fire, electrical shock, or falling objects.)
7. Do not install the unit in humid, dusty, or sooty locations.
(Doing so may cause fire or electrical shock.)
8. If any unusual smells or smoke come from the unit, stop using the product.
In such case, immediately disconnect the power source and contact the
service center. (Continued use in such a condition may cause fire or
electrical shock.)
9. If this product fails to operate normally, contact the store of purchase or
your nearest service center. Never disassemble or modify this product in
any way. (Samsung is not liable for problems caused by unauthorized
modifications or attempted repair.)
10. When cleaning, do not spray water directly onto parts of the product.
Wipe the surface with a dry cloth. Never use detergents or chemical
cleaners on the product, as this may result in discoloration of surface or
cause damage to the finish.
Caution
1. Do not drop objects on the product or apply strong shock to it. Keep away
from a location subject to excessive vibration or magnetic interference.
2. Do not install in a location subject to high temperature (over 122), low
temperature (below 14), or high humidity.
3. Avoid a location which is exposed to direct sunlight, or near heat sources
such as heaters or radiators.
(Neglecting to do so may result in a risk of fire.)
4. If you want to relocate the already installed product, be sure to turn off the
power and then move or reinstall it.
5. Install in a well-ventilated location.
6. Remove the power plug from the outlet when there is a lightning storm.
(Neglecting to do so may cause fire or damage to the product.)
Warning
1. Be sure to use only the supplied adapter.
(Using an adapter other than the one supplied may cause fire, electrical
shock, or damage to the product.)
2. When connecting the power supply and signal wires, check the external
connection terminals before connecting them. Connect the alarm signal
wires to the alarm terminals, the AC adapter to the AC power input
receptacle, and the DC adapter to the DC power input, making sure that
the correct polarity is observed.
(Connecting the power supply incorrectly may cause fire, electrical shock,
or damage to the product.)
3. Do not connect multiple cameras to a single adapter.
(Exceeding the capacity may cause abnormal heat generation or fire.)
(A falling camera may cause personal injury.)
4. Securely plug the power cord into the power receptacle.
(Insecure connection may cause fire.)
5. When installing the camera on a wall or ceiling, fasten it securely and
firmly. (A falling camera may cause personal injury.)
1-2 1-1
E
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interface in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can
be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the following measures:
- Reorient of relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help.
Approval of Standards
Before Usage
This is a basic instruction manual for the SCC-641(P) user.
It contains all the instructions needed to use the SCC-641(P) from
a simple introduction of the control locations and functions of the
SCC-641(P) to installation methods in the set up menu.
We recommend all users of the SCC-641(P) from the advanced
user who has used similar cameras before to the general user to
read the instruction manual before using.
The most frequently used feature in the SCC-641(P) would be the
SCC-641(P) Setup Menu.
The SCC-641(P) Setup Menu is explained in detailed in "Chapter
3 Setup Menu Overview".
The instructional manual is best used when read from beginning
to end, but for users wanting to read only the part they need here
are the Chapter summaries.
"Chapter 1 SCC-641(P) Overview" includes a brief introduction
of the SCC-641(P), part names and functions, and Switch
Settings.
"Chapter 2 SCC-641(P) Installation" explains the installation
procedures of the SCC-641(P) and provides preparation and
installation environment requirements.
"Chapter 3 Setup Menu Overview" presents the structure of the
Setup menu for the SCC-641(P) including a detailed explanation
of the functions performed in each submenu.
"Appendix SCC-641(P) Product Specifications" contains
product specifications of the SCC-641(P) in itemized categories.
1-4
E
1-3
- SHUTTER 3-10
- AGC 3-11
- WHITE BAL 3-12
- SPECIAL 3-14
- AUTO FOCUS 3-15
- D-ZOOM 3-15
- EXIT 3-15
PRESET 3-16
AUTO MODE 3-18
- AUTO PAN 3-18
- PATTERN 3-20
ALARM SET 3-21
OTHER SET 3-23
Appendix Product specifications 3-25
" Table of contents "
Before Usage 1-1
Chapter 1 SCC-641(P) Overview 1-5
SCC-641(P) Introduction 1-6
SCC-641(P) Location of Controls 1-7
Locations of Controls - Front 1-7
Locations of Controls - Back 1-8
ADAPTER CONNECTION 1-9
INITIAL SETTING 1-10
Setting RS-422A/RS-485 Termination 1-11
SWITCH SETTING 1-12
Chapter 2 SCC-641(P) Installations 2-1
Checking Package Contents 2-2
Precautions for Installation and Usage 2-3
Preparing the Cable 2-5
Cable Connection 2-6
SCC-641(P) Installation 2-7
Chapter 3 Setup Menu Overview 3-1
Structure of the Setup Menu 3-2
CAMERA BLOCK MENU Contents 3-5
- CAMERA ID 3-5
- V-SYNC 3-6
- ZOOM SPEED 3-6
- MOTION DET 3-7
- EXIT 3-8
VIDEO SET MENU 3-9
- IRIS 3-9
1-6
E
1-5
SCC-641(P) Introduction
The SCC-641(P) is the best performing zoom lens integrated surveillance
camera. It can be used with CCTV in banks or companies to provide high
level of security.
The SCC-641(P) is a high quality surveillance camera using x22 zoom lens
and digital zoom IC, it can catch clear images up to 220 times.
The SCC-641(P) has Low light function that enables it to take shots in the
environment where there is almost no light, White Balance function that
corrects the picture natural depending on the background lights, Back light
Compensation function that enables objects to be seen clearly even under
bright-background lighting conditions and Auto Focus function that enables it
to focus according to the movement of the object. It is a multifunction camera
that has all the important functions of other surveillance cameras.
The SCC-641(P) uses an Alarm function for alert situations and moving
camera in the direction you want, ZOOM-IN and ZOOM-OUT functions can
be remote controlled.
Chapter 1 SCC-641(P) Overview
In this chapter we will briefly introduce the SCC-641(P) and
show main functions, locations of control and Switch Setting.
1-8
E
1-7
BACK Locations of Control
FRONT
1-10
E
1-9
ADAPTER CONNECTION
SCC-641(P) Adapter BOARD
INITIAL SETTING
CAMERA ADDRESS SETUP
Dip Switch setting is same as the following example:
EX) CAMERA ADDR: When it's number 1, set as follows.
Setting communication Protocol
Use number 5~8 PIN of SW501 to set communication Protocol.
Baud Rate Setting
Use PIN 3 and 4 of SW501.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
SW500
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
BAUD RATE
4800 BPS
9600 BPS
19200 BPS
38400 BPS
PIN 3
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
PIN 4
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
A : SAMSUNG(SSC-1000)HALF
B : SAMSUNG(SSC-1000)FULL
PIN5 PIN6 PIN7 PIN8
A OFF OFF OFF OFF
B ON OFF OFF OFF
C OFF ON OFF OFF
D ON ON OFF OFF
E OFF OFF ON OFF
F ON OFF ON OFF
G OFF ON ON OFF
H ON ON ON OFF
I OFF OFF OFF ON
J ON OFF OFF ON
K OFF ON OFF ON
L ON ON OFF ON
M OFF OFF ON ON
N ON OFF ON ON
O OFF ON ON ON
P ON ON ON ON
PIN
Comp
SW501
SW500
SEE INSTRUCTIN MANUAL
(BOTTOM VIEW)
1-12
E
1-11
SWITCH SETTING
Setting RS-422A/RS-485 termination
As it is shown in the structure map, when Controller and RS-422A/RS-485 is connected it
should be terminated according to the Cable feature of impedance on the each end of
the transmitting line to transfer the signals in long distance by controlling the reflection of
the signals to the lowest.
<RS-485 Half Duplex Organization>
n < 128
Termination
SW1-ON
Division
Termination: using numbers 1 and 2 PIN, turn to ON and it will be terminated.
<RS-422A/RS-485 Full Duplex Organization>
Division
Division
SW1-ON
SW2-ON
n < 128
CAUTION
If more than one camera is set of same address, Communication
error can be occurred.
Receiver Address
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
SW500-1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SW500-2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW500-3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-5
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-6
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-7
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-8
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
1-14
E
1-13
Receiver Address
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
SW500-1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SW500-2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW500-3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-4
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-5
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-6
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-7
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-8
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Receiver Address
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
SW500-1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SW500-2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW500-3
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-5
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-6
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-7
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-8
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
1-16
E
1-15
Receiver Address
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
SW500-1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SW500-2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW500-3
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-4
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-5
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-7
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-6
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Receiver Address
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
SW500-1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SW500-2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW500-3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-5
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-6
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-7
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
2-2
E
2-1
Before Installing
Checking Package Contents
Please check that all components listed below are included in the package:
SCC-641(P)
Bracket Anchor
Camera Holder
Cover Body
Chapter 2 SCC-641(P) Installation
In this chapter we will look over the checkpoints before installation,
installation environmental requirements, and precautions during the
installation of the SCC-641(P). After that we'll show the actual
installation of the SCC-641(P) and cable connections.
Owners Instructions
2-4
E
2-3
Never face the SCC-641(P) towards the sun.
Whether the SCC-641(P) is in use or not, never face it towards the sun. Use
with caution when operating the SCC-641(P) in the vicinity of spotlights or
other bright lights and light reflecting objects.
The SCC-641(P) should be operated in a stable environment.
Acceptable operating conditions are listed below:
Temperature : -10+50(14122 )
Humidity level : 90% or less
Proper electric power should be used according to the specifications of
the SCC-641(P) power supply system.
Power Consumed : 18W
Power Input : 24VAC, 1.5A
Precautions for Installation and Usage.
Do not attempt to disassemble the SCC-641(P).
There is a danger of electric shock if the screws or cover are removed. We
strongly recommend that users avoid handling the interior part of the
SCC-641(P). If it becomes necessary to inspect the inside, please contact
a distributor.
Handle the SCC-641(P) with care.
Although the SCC-641(P) is a durable product, handling the product carefully
will lengthen its operating life and prevent failures. Avoid shaking or directly
impacting the camera to prevent damage to the product and handle and store
properly.
Do not expose the SCC-641(P) to rain or moisture or operate it in wet
area.
If the SCC-641(P) comes in contact with water, turn the power switch off
immediately and contact a distributor. Moisture can damage the SCC-641(P)
and increases the danger of electric shock.
Do not use strong detergents or abrasive detergents to clean the
SCC-641(P) body.
If the SCC-641(P) body becomes dirty, use a dry cloth to clean the unit.
In case the dirt is hard to remove, use a mild detergent and wipe gently.
2-6
E
2-5
Cable Connection
1. First, connect one end of the BNC video cable connector to the Video Output
Terminal (VIDEO OUT)
2. Then, connect the other end of the connector to the Video Input Terminal of
the monitor.
3. Now connect the Power Adapter Cable. Use a driver to screw one part of the two
lines of Power Adapter to Power Input Terminal of the SCC-641(P).
4. Adjust the switch below the Power Adapter to the proper voltage. Then, connect
the Power Adapter's plug to the Power Connector.
5. Connect the Remote Control Terminal of the SCC-641(P) and the external
Controller.
To install and use the SCC-641(P), the following cables should be prepared.
Power Adapter Cable
The cable connected to the Power input terminal of the SCC-641(P) is shown below with
a rated voltage of 24VAC and ampacity of 1.5A.
Video Cable
The SCC-641(P)'s cable is a BNC Cable for connecting the video-output terminal to
the video-input terminal of the monitor.
Preparing the Cables
2-8
E
2-7
1. [Figure 1] Install the structure on the ceiling.
(Refer to Installation reference for the Length of the structure)
* Built in by the builder of the structure
3. [Figure 2] Assemble the BRKT-ANCHOR on the ceiling and screw the 4 bolts in.
SCC-641(P) Installation
[Figure 2]
[Figure 1]
2. Make a hole in the ceiling where the camera will be installed.
(The hole should be about 180)
5. [Figure 5] Match the BRKT-ANCHOR and CAMERA ADAPTER and use 4screws
(PH M4x8) to assemble them.
[Figure 5]
4. [Figure 3,4] Connect the various cables to the CAMERA ADAPTER. (See page 2-6)
[Figure 4]
[Figure 3]
Lenght of ceiling Hole
3-1
E
Chapter 3 Setup Menu Overview
In this chapter, we will look over the Setup Menu of the SCC-641(P),
First we'll look over the overall structure of the Setup Menu, and then
we'll look at the functions of each menu.
2-9
6. [Figure 6] Match the 3 holes on the back of the CAMERA and the CONNECTOR
and turn it left about 15 degrees.
(Check the sound of LOCKING and that the LEVER-LOCKING is in place)
* Use the screws (BH M3XL8) to connect the CAMERA and the ADAPTER
so they don't move.
[Figure 6]
7. [Figure 7] Assemble the COVER-DOME onto the DOME.
[Figure 7]
3-3
E
3-2
ALARM SET ALARM PRIORITY SET ALARM1 1~4
ALARM2 1~4
ALARM3 1~4
ALARM4 1~4
EXIT QUIT/SAVE
ALARM IN SET ALARM1 NO/NC/OFF
ALARM2 NO/NC/OFF
ALARM3 NO/NC/OFF
ALARM4 NO/NC/OFF
EXIT QUIT/SAVE
ALARM OUT SET ALARM1 1~3
ALARM2 1~3
ALARM3 1~3
ALARM4 1~3
MOTION 1~3
EXIT QUIT/SAVE
ALARM PATTERN SET ALARM1 OFF/1~3/HALF1/HALF2/FULL
ALARM2 OFF/1~3/HALF1/HALF2/FULL
MOTION OFF/1~3/HALF1/HALF2/FULL
EXIT QUIT/SAVE
AUX OUT CONTROL OUT1 ON/OFF
OUT2 ON/OFF
OUT3 ON/OFF
EXIT QUIT/SAVE
OTHER SET AC OFF/6HOUR/12HOUR/18HOUR/24HOUR
P.P/T ON/OFF
HOME RETURN OFF/1~60MIN/2~2HOUR
HOME POSITION 0~127
AUTO FLIP ON/OFF
PRIVACY ZONE ...
CAM RESET ...
LANGUAGE ENGLISH
EXIT QUIT/SAVE
CAMERA CAMERA ID ON.../OFF
V-SYNC INT/LINE...
ZOOM SPEED 1/2/3/4
MOTION DET ON.../OFF
EXIT QUIT/SAVE/PRESET
VIDEO SET IRIS ALC.../MANU...
SHUTTER OFF/1/100~1OK,AUTO/FIX
AGC ON/OFF
WHITE BAL ATW/AWC/MANU...
SPECIAL ON.../OFF POSI/NEGA + / -
PIP ON.../OFF
MIRROR ON/OFF
H-DTL
V-DTL
RET
AUTO FOCUS AF/MF/ONEAF
D-ZOOM OFF/ X2 ~ X10
EXIT QUIT/SAVE/PRESET
PRESET POSITION SET ...
VIDEO SET ON.../OFF
PRESET ID ON.../OFF
SCAN ON/OFF
DWELL TIME 1~60S
EXIT QUIT/SAVE/DEL
AUTO MODE AUTO PAN ...
PATTERN SET 1/2/3
Structure of the Setup Menu
3-5
E
3-4
CAMERA BLOCK MENU Contents
Camera Menu consists of CAMERA SET Menu and VIDEO SET Menu.
CAMERA ID
The CAMERA ID menu assigns an ID to the SCC-641(P) to be displayed on the
connected monitor.On the CAMERA SET menu screen, select CAMERA ID to ON and
press [Enter]. You will see the sub screen for deciding on the ID of the SCC-641(P).
The Camera ID can have up to 12 alphanumeric characters, along with several special
characters.The assigned camera ID may be positioned to any desired location on the
screen by using the LOCATION submenu.
Press
[Enter]
* " ... " Means there are Sub Menus.
The diagram shown above illustrates the overall structure of the Setup Menu.
In this section, a description of the Setup menu features will enable users of
the SCC-641(P) to tailor it to their personal needs.
(CAMERA SET)
CAMERA ID OFF
V-SYNC INT
ZOOM SPEED 3
MOTION DET OFF
EXIT QUIT
(VIDEO SET)
IRIS ALC...
SHUTTER OFF
AGC ON
WHITE BAL ATW
SPECIAL OFF
AUTO FOCUS AF
D-ZOOM OFF
EXIT QUIT
(CAMERA SET)
CAMERA ID ON...
V-SYNC INT
ZOOM SPEED 3
MOTION DET OFF
EXIT QUIT
(CAMERA ID)
A B C D E F G H I J K L
M N O PQ R S T U V W X
Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
: ! - + ( ) /
SP SP
LOCATION...
RET
SCC-641(P)...
3-7
E
3-6
MOTION DET
In MOTION DET, you can set the Motion Detection function, Motion Detection Sensitivity, and
the Area of Motion Detection. If the Motion Detection function is set, the movement of an
intruder can be detected. When motion is detected, it sets off the Alarm signal of the
Controller.
Select ON and press [Enter] you will see the "MOTION DET" submenu. The "AREA" menu,
the screen area where the Motion Detection function is going to be applied, can be set as
PRESET or USER. If the "AREA" menu is set to PRESET, the Motion Detection function will
be applied to the basic part of the SCC-641(P)'s factory default presets. Set the AREA menu
to USER and press [ENTER], the user can choose the size of the area and location where the
Motion Detection function should be applied.When the area is not blinking, you can use the
[Left, Right, Up, Down] keys to move and set the size. If you press [ENTER] when the area is
not blinking, it will start to blink and you can use the [Left, Right, Up, Down] keys to set the
position of the area. Use the [ENTER] and [Left, Right, Up, Down] keys to set the position and
size of the Motion Detection Area.If you press [ENTER] once more, you will exit the "AREA"
setting menu.Use the "SENSITIVITY" menu to set the sensitivity of the MOTION Detection.The
Higher it is set, the more sensitive the Motion Detection moves.
Use the
[Left, Right, Up, Down]
Keys
Press
[Enter]
*Motion Detection function does not operate while handling slow SHUTTER, PRESET,
SCAN, PATTERN MODE, or JOYSTICK.
V-SYNC
In the V-SYNC menu, vertical synchronization can be
selected. The vertical synchronization signal supported
by the SCC-641(P) is the INT mode made by clock inside
the SCC-641(P) and LINE mode adjusting vertical
synchronization to the exterior power frequency.
Select LINE and press [Enter]. You will see the LINE LOCK submenu where you can
adjust the phase of the LINE LOCK.
You can use the PHASE menu of the LINE LOCK submenu to assign as much PHASE
as you want.
ZOOM SPEED
In the ZOOM SPEED menu you can select the speed of
the ZOOM Key (Tele/Wide).
Use the [Left] or [Right] keys in the ZOOM SPEED
menu to selcet the speed.
1 : Magnification x 22 takes about 17 seconds
Slowest speed
Low speed
High speed
Fastest speed
Press
[Enter]
(CAMERA SET)
CAMERA ID OFF
V-SYNC INT
ZOOM SPEED 3
MOTION DET OFF
EXIT QUIT
(CAMERA SET)
CAMERA ID OFF
V-SYNC LINE...
ZOOM SPEED 3
MOTION DET OFF
EXIT QUIT
(CAMERA SET)
CAMERA ID OFF
V-SYNC INT
ZOOM SPEED 3
MOTION DET OFF
EXIT QUIT
(CAMERA SET)
CAMERA ID OFF
V-SYNC INT
ZOOM SPEED 3
MOTION DET ON..
EXIT QUIT
(MOTION DET)
AREA USER...
SENSITIVITY LOW
RET
SIZE
POSITION
SIZE
POSITION
(LINE LOCK)
PHASE ( 000) ---- I ----
RET
3-9
E
3-8
VIDEO SET MENU
IRIS
The video output level of the monitor can be controlled by the IRIS lens depending on the
level of the incoming light.The video output level can be set in the ALC (Auto Light
Compensation) menu.The opening and shutting of the Iris lens can be set manually in
the MANU menu.
BLC (Submenu of the ALC/MANU menu)
With conventional cameras, strong background lighting interferes with the clarity of
objects, making them appear dark. In the SCC-641(P), setting the BLC (Back Light
Compensation), submenu of ALC/MANU menu, will solve the problem of backlight and
give you a clear screen.
ALC
Choose the ALC of the IRIS item and press [ENTER] and set he submenu to the Video
Output level and BLC will be shown.The Video Output Level can be set in the level item
using the [Left, Right] keys.Set the BLC menu to ON and the Back Light Compensation
function will be applied to the screen areas of AREA menu.The screen area where Back
Light Compensation should be applied can be set with the PRESET or USER item.If the
AREA menu is set to PRESET, the backlight compensation function is applied to the
factory defaults of the SCC-641(P).If the AREA menu is set to USER and [ENTER] is
pressed, the user can select the applied area of the backlight compensation function.
When the area is not blinking, you can use the [Left, Right, Up, Down] keys to move and
set the size. If you press [ENTER] when the area is not blinking, it will start to blink and
you can use the [Left, Right, Up, Down] key to set the position of the area. Use [ENTER]
and the [Left, Right, Up, Down] keys to set the position and size of the Motion Detection
Area. If you press [ENTER] once more, you will exit the "AREA" setting menu.
Press
[Enter]
EXIT
The EXIT menu is used to quit the CAMERA SET menu of the SCC-641(P) and return
to the MAIN MENU.
- QUIT: Ignores the changed information and restores the saved information.
- SAVE: Saves the information of the setting condition of the menu.
- PRESET: Ignores the changed information and restores the initial factory defaults
of the menu.
(CAMERA SET)
CAMERA ID OFF
V-SYNC INT
ZOOM SPEED 3
MOTION DET OFF
EXIT QUIT
(VIDEO SET)
IRIS ALC...
SHUTTER OFF
AGC ON
WHITE BAL ATW
SPECIAL OFF
AUTO FOCUS AF
D-ZOOM OFF
EXIT QUIT
(ALC)
AREA PRESET...
BLC OFF
LEVEL (0) ---- I ----
RET
3-11
E
3-10
If your press the left/right keys continuously, the speed will appear in the following order.
OFF 1/100(1/120) 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000
1/4000 1/10K OFF AUTOX2 AUTOX4 AUTOX6
AUTOX8 AUTOX12 AUTOX16 AUTOX24 AUTOX32
AUTOX48 AUTOX64 AUTOX96 AUTOX128 OFF
FIX X2 - FIX X4 FIX X6 FIX X8 FIX X12 FIX X16
FIX X24FIX X32 FIX X48 FIX X64 FIX X96 FIX X128
AGC
In the AGC (Automatic Gain Control) menu, you can set the gain automatically when the
brightness of the screen is filmed at less than the standard in low-light conditions.
To automatically control GAIN, set the AGC menu to ON or set it to OFF for manual control.
If the SHUTTER menu is set to AUTO low speed shutter, the value of the AGC menu can
not be changed.
MANU
If the IRIS item is set to MANU, the sub screen to open and shut the Iris manually will
be shown. Using the [Left, Right] keys in the LEVEL item you can set Iris manual
setting.
Use the
Keys
SHUTTER
In the SHUTTER menu, the high-speed Electric shutter and AUTO low speed shutter of the
SCC-641(P) and the FIX low speed shutter can be set.The High speed Electric Shutter
supports 7 different speeds from 1/100 to 1/10,000 of a second. The AUTO low speed
shutter and FIX low speed shutter supports 12 different speeds from 2x to 128x
magnifications.The Low speed shutter is the function that sets the shutter speed to low in
order to clearly see the object filmed in low light. To automatically slow down the speed of
the shutter by sensing the brightness of the light, set to AUTO low speed shutter. If the user
wants to select the speed of the shutter, set it to FIX.The number after the AUTO and FIX are
the number of the fields stored.The larger the number of the fields, the slower the shutter
speed gets, so in a still screen the screen is much clearer.
If the object were in motion it would be blurry.
Press
[Enter]
SIZE
POSITION
SIZE
POSITION
(VIDEO SET)
IRIS MANU...
SHUTTER OFF
AGC ON
WHITE BAL ATW
SPECIAL OFF
AUTO FOCUS AF
D-ZOOM OFF
EXIT QUIT
(MANUAL)
LEVEL ( 00) ---- I ----
RET
(VIDEO SET)
IRIS ALC...
SHUTTER OFF
AGC ON
WHITE BAL ATW
SPECIAL OFF
AUTO FOCUS AF
D-ZOOM OFF
EXIT QUIT
(VIDEO SET)
IRIS ALC...
SHUTTER OFF
AGC ON
WHITE BAL ATW
SPECIAL OFF
AUTO FOCUS AF
D-ZOOM OFF
EXIT QUIT
3-13
E
3-12
WHITE BAL
The WHITE BAL menu insures that white is calibrated normally under any color
temperature condition. When the WHITE BAL menu is set to the ATW mode, the white
balance is automatically specified according to the color temperature.In the case of
setting the WHITE BAL menu to AWC mode, pressing [ENTER] while having a white
paper in front of the Camera will automatically set the white balance in accordance with
the color temperature only one time.
If WHITE BAL menu is set to MANUAL mode, the user can set the white Balance
considering the current illumination.
- 3200K : Set color temperature to 3200K
- 5600K : Set color temperature to 5600K
- User : Set the appropriate value in the RED and BULE graph.
MANU: Select MANU item and press [ENTER], the sub screen where you can select
manual White Balance will be shown.
Use the left/right keys to select 3200K, 5600K or USER mode in the PRESET menu.
Press
[Enter]
WHITE BAL
Lights are generally denoted as color temperatures and expressed in Kelvin (K)
units.
The general light color temperatures are shown below.
Blue sky
Rainy
Cloudy
Partly Cloudy
Sunny
Fluorescent lamp
Tungsten lamp
Candlelight
Halogen lamp
1000K
2000K
3000K
4000K
5000K
6000K
7000K
8000K
9000K
10000K
(VIDEO SET)
IRIS ALC...
SHUTTER OFF
AGC ON
WHITE BAL MANU...
SPECIAL OFF
AUTO FOCUS AF
D-ZOOM OFF
EXIT QUIT
(AWB/MANU)
PRESET OFF(USER)..
RED (00) ---- I ----
BLUE (00) ---- I ----
RET
3-15
E
3-14
AUTO FOCUS
In the AUTO FOCUS MENU, the Focus method can be set to AF, MF,
or ONEAF.
- AF: With AUTO FOCUS MODE, you can monitor the screen continuously and it will focus
automatically. While moving the zoom keys, it will automatically focus so FOCUS
key input is not necessary.
- MF: In MANUAL FOCUS MODE the user adjusts the Focus manually.
- ONEAF: In ONEAF mode the SCC-641(P) auto focuses only while moving/stopping.
When the SCC-641(P) is not moving it is same as MF mode and when it's
moving/stopping it's the same as AF mode.
Use the left/right keys to select AF, MF or ONEAF in the AUTO FOCUS menu.
D-ZOOM
In the D-ZOOM menu you can choose the Digital Zoom magnification.
You can select a magnification from OFF to 10 times.
When Digital Zoom is selected at 10 times, it is the Optic Zoom for 22 times the size so
the camera can film at up to 220 times.
Use the [left, right] keys to select the magnification in the D-ZOOM menu.
EXIT
It's the same as the EXIT function of the CAMERA SET menu.
SPECIAL
In the SPECIAL menu, POSI/NEGA, PIP, Mirror, and vertical and horizontal detail level
can be adjusted.
- POSI/NEGA: Video output signal is outputted normal/reverse.
- PIP(Picture in Picture): When Digital Zoom is activated, the 1/16 minimized screen
will be shown.
- Mirror: Reverse the video output signal.
- H-DTL: Adjust Horizontal Detail Level.
- V-DTL: Adjust Vertical Detail Level.
Select ON and press [ENTER], the "SPECIAL" submenu to choose the special
functions will be shown.
To choose functions use the left/right keys to select an item.In the PIP menu, select ON
and press [ENTER]. Use the [left, right, up, down] keys to set the location of the PIP.
PIP Screen
Press
[Enter]
Press
[Enter]
PIP does not function in low speed SHUTTER MODE.
When Mirror is functioning, Mirror does not function in the PIP windows.
(VIDEO SET)
IRIS ALC...
SHUTTER OFF
AGC ON
WHITE BAL ATW
SPECIAL ON...
AUTO FOCUS AF
D-ZOOM OFF
EXIT QUIT
(SPECIAL)
POSI/NEGA +
PIP OFF
MIRROR OFF
H-DTL ( 0) ---- I --
V-DTL ( 0) --- I ---
RET
(SPECIAL)
POSI/NEGA +
PIP ON...
MIRROR OFF
H-DTL ( 0) ---- I ----
V-DTL ( 0) --- I -----
RET
(VIDEO SET)
IRIS ALC..
SHUTTER OFF
AGC ON
WHITE BAL ATW
SPECIAL OFF
AUTO FOCUS AF
D-ZOOM OFF
EXIT QUIT
(VIDEO SET)
IRIS ALC..
SHUTTER OFF
AGC ON
WHITE BAL ATW
SPECIAL OFF
AUTO FOCUS AF
D-ZOOM OFF
EXIT QUIT
(VIDEO SET)
IRIS ALC...
SHUTTER OFF
AGC ON
WHITE BAL ATW
SPECIAL OFF
AUTO FOCUS AF
D-ZOOM X10
EXIT QUIT
3-17
E
3-16
POSITION SET
From "POSITION SET..." press [ENTER] to get into the
PAN/TILT, FOCUS/ZOOM SET screen to set the PAN/TILT
location and FOCUS/ZOOM condition then press [ENTER]
to return to a higher menu.
VIDEO SET
This is the screen setting function for each PRESET.
Refer to the explanation under "VIDEO SET menu".
PRESET ID
This is the ID set up function for each PRESET.
It can be set up to 12 characters using the left, right, up,
and down keys.
The ID location can be set in the submenu of
"LOCATION..."
SCAN
This function sets up for movement or no movement in
"SCAN" motion.
When it's PRESET to "ON" it includes SCAN motion
and to "OFF" no movement.
DWELL TIME
This is a function setting for the DWELL TIME of the PRESET location in "SCAN" motion.
It can set DWELL TIME From 1 ~ 60 Sec.
EXIT
"QUIT": Does not save the selected information and returns to a higher menu.
"SAVE": Do saves the selected information and returns to a higher menu.
"DEL" : Deletes the selected information and restores the DEFAULT.
Then returns to a higher menu.
PRESET
A total of 128 presets are available including the selection of PAN/TILT location and
Zoom/Focus, and setting up screen conditions and monitoring. (0 ~ 127)
Among the 128 PRESETS PRESET 0: HOME POSITION, PRESET 1: ALARM1,
PRESET 2: ALARM2, PRESET 3: ALARM3, PRESET 4: ALARM4,PRESET 5: set as
special preset corresponding MOTION.
Press
[Enter]
Press
[Enter]
** MAIN MENU **
CAMERA...
VIDEO SET...
PRESET...
AUTO MODE...
ALARM SET...
OTHER SET...
(PRESET MAP)
0 H 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29
30 31 RET
ID:PRESET 0
PRESET NO.0
POSITION SET ...
VIDEO SET ON...
PRESET ID ON...
SCAN ON
DWELL TIME 2S
EXIT QUIT
PRESET NO.0 ID
Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
: ! - + * ( ) /
SP SP
LOCATION...
RET
PRESET 0....
PRESET NO.0
POSITION SET...
VIDEO SET... ON...
PRESET ID ON...
SCAN ON
DWELL TIME 2S
EXIT QUIT
PRESET NO.0
SET PAN/TILT
SET ZOOM/FOCUS
3-19
E
3-18
SET END!
END SET
"END SET" gets into the END SET setup screen by
pressing [ENTER]. Adjust PAN/TILT location and
press [ENTER] to return to a higher menu.
DIRECTION
Set up the movement direction of the START to END location (PAN location standard)
"RIGHT " : "LEFT " :
ENDLESS
This is a 360-degree rotation function that only stops for the DWELL TIME in the START and
END positions. It can be set to "ON" or "OFF".
SPEED
This is a setting function for movement speed setup. It can be set from STEP1 to
STEP64.
DWELL TIME
This is a function for setting up the time to stay in the START to END position.
SET START!
AUTO MODE
AUTO PAN and PATTERN functions are in AUTO MODE.
AUTO PAN
After selecting the locations of two points (PAN/TILT) of START and END, it loops
continuously in the set up SPEED.
START SET
From "START SET..." get into the START SET setup
screen by pressing [ENTER]. After selecting the
locations of PAN/TILT location, press [ENTER] again to
return to higher menu.
Press
[Enter]
Press
[Enter]
** MAIN MENU **
CAMERA...
VIDEO SET...
PRESET...
AUTO MODE...
ALARM SET...
OTHER SET...
(AUTO MODE)
AUTO PAN ...
PATTERN SET 1...
RET
AUTO PAN
START SET ...
END SET ...
DIRECTION RIGHT
ENDLESS ON
SPEED STEP5
DWELL TIME 2 S
EXIT QUIT
3-21
E
3-20
ALARM SET
It consists of 4 ALARM INPUTs and 3 ALARM OUTs.It can sense an ALARM input from
exterior SENSORs and it performs with PRESET or PATTERN function and outputs the
ALARM OUT signals.
It recognizes the ALARM signal input as an ALARM signal when it continnes more than
150ms for a time and each ALARM movement time is decided depending on it's
correspondence to the DWELL TIME of the PRESET and PATTERN connected.
ALARM PRIORITY SET
Sets the priority of the 4 ALARM inputs and corresponds to
priority.The priority of the DEFAULT is ALARM1: 1, ALARM2:
2, ALARM 3: 3, ALARM: 4.If the ALARM is working at the
same time and the priority is the same, it will operate
according to the DEFAULT priority.While the ALARM is
working, it cannot detect MOTION.
ALARM IN SET
Set the TYPE to "NO" (Normal Open), "NC" (Normal Close),
or "OFF" depending on the features of the SENSOR
connected.
Press
[Enter]
PATTERN
This is a replay function so that the MANUAL functions such as PAN, TILT, ZOOM,
and FOCUS are played for 30 seconds.
PATTERN1 SET
PATTERN can be set to 3. Choose 1, 2, or 3 with the left or right key in the "PATTERN
SET" and press [ENTER] to get into the PATTERN set up screen.
From the moment "PATTERN 1 SET" is gone for 30 seconds, it memorizes the
MANUAL movements and after 30 seconds it will return to a higher menu.
If you want to finish set up before the 30-second ends, press [ENTER].
Press
[Enter]
Press
[Enter]
** MAIN MENU **
CAMERA...
VIDEO SET...
PRESET...
AUTO MODE...
ALARM SET...
OTHER SET...
(AUTO MODE)
AUTO PAN ...
PATTERN SET 1...
RET
** MAIN MENU **
CAMERA...
VIDEO SET...
PRESET...
AUTO MODE...
ALARM SET...
OTHER SET...
( ALARM SET)
ALARM PRIORITY SET..
ALARM IN SET..
ALARM OUT SET..
ALARM PATTERN SET..
AUX OUT CONTROL..
RET
ALARM PRIORITY
ALARM1 1
ALARM2 2
ALARM3 3
ALARM4 4
EXIT QUIT
ALARM IN
ALARM1 NO
ALARM2 NC
ALARM3 NO
ALARM4 NC
EXIT QUIT
3-23
E
3-22
ALARM OUT
Each ALARM input corresponds to one of the 3
ALARM OUT. < The ALARM3 is designed as the
Relay OUT >
ALARM PATTERN
This sets the operation of PATTERN movements when
inputting ALARM.
When the ALARM is inputted the correspondence will
be as follows: ALARM1 input to PRESET 1, ALARM 2
input to PRESET 2, ALARM3 input to PRESET 3,
ALARM 4 input to PRESET 4, and MOTION input to
PRESET 5.
When the ALARM is working, it will stay in the PRESET
location corresponding the ALARM for the DWELL
TIME and the ALARM connected to the PATTERN will
continuously operate the PATTERN movements.
AUX OUT CONTROL
The OFF in the Setup Menu does not operate the PATTERN, and it means 1
PATTERN1, 2 PATTERN 2, 3 PATTERN 3, continuous motion of HALF1
PATTERN 1 + PATTERN 2, continuous motion of HALF 2 Pattern 2 + PATTERN 3
and continuous motion of FULL PATTERN 1+PATTERN2+PATTERN3.
This sets the ALARM OUT motion to continue or act only
when the ALARM is working.
If it is set to OFF the ALARM OUT motion will operate
only when the ALARM is set off (Active "Low"), and if it's
set to ON, the ALARM OUT will always operate
regardless of the ALARM.
SET UP TIME FOR HOME RETURN:
OFF: HOME RETURN function cancellation
OFF 1 MIN 2 MIN 3 MIN ~ 60MIN ~12HOUR
AUTO FLIP
When operating the Tilt to the 90 limit using the Joystick, the camera PAN automatically
revolves 180 showing the opposite area of the Tilt area.
It gives the effect of extending the Tilt operating area 180.
HOME POSITION
You can select the HOME POSITION from the preset positions numbered between 0
and 127.
ALARM OUT
ALARM1 1
ALARM2 2
ALARM3 3
ALARM4 2
MOTION 1
EXIT QUIT
ALARM PATTERN
ALARM1 OFF
ALARM2 OFF
ALARM3 1
ALARM4 2
MOTION 3
EXIT QUIT
AUX OUT CONTROL
OUT1 OFF
OUT2 OFF
OUT3 ON
EXIT QUIT
OTHER SET
AC(Auto Calibration)
This function turns on or off Auto Calibration. SCC-C641(P) has the Auto Calibration
function to improve the precision of LENS and PAN/TILT motor.
You may set to OFF/6HOUR/12HOUR/18HOUR/24HOUR. Without users key input for
the time designated by the user, A.C. will appear on the screen while initializing LENS
and PAN/TILT.
P.P/T(Proportional PAN/TILT)
This function controls the PAN/TILT speed to the ZOOM magnification ratio during the
manual operation of PAN/TILT. If you set PROPORTIONAL P/T to ON, the PAN/TILT
speed will increase in the ZOOM WIDE mode and decrease in the ZOON TELE mode
even in the same manual operation.
HOME RETURN
When there is no KEY input or other movement for a certain time, the camera moves to
the HOME location automatically. The HOME location can be assigned from the HOME
POSITION menu.
3-25
E
3-24
CAM RESET
CAM RESET clears all the settings made so far and restores the factory default settings.
"CAMERA RESET?" message appears when you select CAM RESET.
Select "CANCEL" to return to the menu setup display or select OK to restore the factory
default settings.
G Be careful when performing a CAM RESET operation, as it deletes all setup values.
Product specifications
Contents
- Zoom lens single body COMBI DOME CAMERA
- AC 2410% (60Hz0.3Hz)
- 18W
- NTSC STANDARD COLOR SYSTEM
- 1/4 inch IT CCD
- 768(H) 494(V)
- 525 Lines, 2:1 Interlace
- Horizontal : 15, 734 Hz(INT) / 15, 750 Hz(L/L)
Vertical : 59.94 Hz(INT) / 60 Hz(L/L)
- INT/LINE LOCK
- 480 TV LINES
- 52dB (AGC OFF)
- 0.3 Lux (SENS UP X4)
(0.01 Lux)
- ATW/AWC/MANUAL MODE
(3200K, 5600K, R/B GAIN Court)
- COMPOSITE VIDEO OUT : 1.0 Vp-p 75 ohms/BNC
- one body; 22X Zoom lens
- Focal length : 3.6 to 79.2 mm
- Aperture : F1.6(Wide), F3.8(Tele)
- Auto Focus
- PAN range : 360Endless
- Preset Pan Speed : 240/sec, maximum
- Manual Pan Speed : 0.8~ 90/sec (64Step)
- TILT range : 0~ 90
- Preset Tilt Speed : 150/sec, maximum
- Manual Tilt Speed : 0.8~ 45/sec (64Step)
- Tele/Wide(ZOOM), Near/Far(FOCUS),
Iris Open/Close, Pan/Tilt
- Alarm Inputs : 4 IN(5mA Sink)
- Alarm Outputs : 3 OUT (Open collector : 2
DC24V 40mA Max, Relay : 1, NO, NC, COM
2A 30VDC, 0.5A 125VAC Max)
- -10C ~ +50C (14F ~ 122F)
- ~90%
- DOME : 147 (),
Outline : 159.5( ) x 176(H)(Adapter:23.5(H)mm)
- 2Kg
NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Items
Product Type
Power Input
Power Consumption
Broadcasting Type
Image Device
Effective Pixels
Scanning Mode
Scanning line Frequency
Synchronization Mode
Resolution
S/N Ratio
Min. Object Illumination
Color Temperature
Signal Output
Lens
PAN Function
TILT Function
REMOTE CONTROL
ALARM
Operation Temperature
Operation Humidity
SIZE
Weight
SCC-641
3-27
E
3-26
Cautions
The copyright of the manual belongs to Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
Without the permission of Samsung Electronics it cannot be reproduced
electronically, mechanically, audibly, or by any other method.
This manual will be modified according to product enhancements.
Product specifications
Contents
- Zoom lens single body COMBI DOME CAMERA
- AC 2410% (50Hz0.3Hz)
- 18W
- PAL STANDARD COLOR SYSTEM
- 1/4 inch IT CCD
- 752(H) 582(V)
- 625 Lines, 2:1 Interlace
Vertical : 50 Hz(INT) / 50 Hz(L/L)
- INT/LINE LOCK
- 480 TV LINES
- 52dB (AGC OFF)
- 0.3 Lux (SENS UP X4)
(0.01 Lux)
- ATW/AWC/MANUAL MODE
- one body; 22X Zoom lens
- Focal length : 3.6 to 79.2 mm
- Aperture : F1.6(Wide), F3.8(Tele)
- Auto Focus
- PAN range : 360Endless
- Preset Pan Speed : 240/sec, maximum
- Manual Pan Speed : 0.8~ 90/sec (64Step)
- TILT range : 0~ 90
- Preset Tilt Speed : 150/sec, maximum
- Manual Tilt Speed : 0.8~ 45/sec (64Step)
- Tele/Wide(ZOOM), Near/Far(FOCUS),
Iris Open/Close, Pan/Tilt
- Alarm Inputs : 4 IN(5mA Sink)
- Alarm Outputs : 3 OUT (Open collector : 2
- -10C ~ +50C (14F ~ 122F)
- ~90%
- DOME : 147 (),
Outline : 159.5( ) x 176(H)(Adapter:23.5(H)mm)
- 2Kg
NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Items
Product Type
Power Input
Power Consumption
Broadcasting Type
Image Device
Effective Pixels
Scanning Mode
Scanning line Frequency
Synchronization Mode
Resolution
S/N Ratio
Min. Object Illumination
Color Temperature
Signal Output
Lens
PAN Function
TILT Function
REMOTE CONTROL
ALARM
Operation Humidity
SIZE
Weight
SCC-641P
D
SmartDome Camera
SCC-641(P)
Benutzerhandbuch
D
Sicherheitshinweise
Ziel dieser Informationen ist es, den ordnungsgemen Gebrauch dieses
Gerts sicherzustellen und dadurch Gefahren oder Sachbeschdigungen zu
vermeiden. Bitte befolgen Sie alle Anweisungen.
* Die Sicherheitshinweise sind mit Warnung und Achtung
gekennzeichnet, wie nachfolgend angegeben:
Warnung: Die Nichtbeachtung eines Warnhinweises kann zum Tode oder
zu schweren Verletzungen fhren.
Achtung: Die Nichtbeachtung eines mit Achtung gekennzeichneten
Hinweises kann zu Verletzungen und Sachschaden fhren.
Die mit Achtung gekennzeichneten
Informationen weisen auf eine mgliche
Gefahr hin, die zu Verletzungen oder
Sachschaden fhren kann.
Achtung
1. Lassen Sie keine Gegenstnde auf das Gert fallen, und schtzen Sie es vor
starken Sten. Setzen Sie die Kamera keinen starken Vibrationen oder
magnetischen Strfeldern aus.
2. Die Kamera darf nicht an Orten mit hohen bzw. tiefen Temperaturen
(ber 50 C und unter -10 C) oder hoher Luftfeuchtigkeit installiert werden.
(Andernfalls besteht die Gefahr eines Brandes oder Stromschlags.)
3. Installieren Sie das Gert nicht in der Nhe von Wrmequellen, wie z. B.
einem Heizgert oder Heizkrper, und an Orten, an denen es direktem
Sonnenlicht ausgesetzt ist. (Hier besteht Feuergefahr.)
4. Wenn Sie die bereits installierte Kamera an einen anderen Ort verlegen
wollen, achten Sie darauf, die Kamera auszuschalten, bevor Sie sie
abnehmen oder neu installieren.
5. Die Installation sollte an einer gut belfteten Stelle erfolgen.
6. Ziehen Sie bei einem Gewitter den Netzstecker. (Wird dies nicht beachtet,
kann ein Brand verursacht oder das Gert beschdigt werden.)
Warnung
1. Achten Sie darauf, dass Sie nur den mitgelieferten Adapter verwenden.
(Die Verwendung eines anderen Adapters als des mitgelieferten kann Feuer,
einen Stromschlag oder die Beschdigung des Gerts verursachen.)
2. Beim Anschlieen der Netz- und Signalkabel mssen zuvor die externen
Anschlussbuchsen berprft werden. Schlieen Sie die Alarmsignalkabeladern
an die Alarmanschlsse, den Netzadapter an die Netzsteckdose und den
Gleichstromadapter an den Gleichstromeingang an, und achten Sie dabei auf
die richtige Polaritt.
(Ein falscher Anschluss an das Stromnetz kann zu Feuer, einem Stromschlag
oder zur Beschdigung des Gerts fhren.)
3. Schlieen Sie nicht mehrere Kameras an einen Adapter an.
(Wird die Kapazitt berschritten, kann es zu einer anormalen
Wrmeentwicklung oder Feuer kommen.)
(Fllt die Kamera herunter, kann es zur Verletzung von Personen kommen.)
4. Stecken Sie das Netzkabel fest in die Steckdose ein.
(Ein loser Anschluss kann einen Brand verursachen.)
5. Bei der Wand- oder Deckeninstallation ist darauf zu achten, dass die Kamera
sicher und fest angebracht wird. (Fllt die Kamera herunter, kann es zur
Verletzung von Personen kommen.)
Die mit Warnung gekennzeichneten
Informationen weisen auf eine mgliche
Gefahr hin, die zum Tode oder zu
schweren Verletzungen fhren kann.
6. Platzieren Sie keine leitfhigen Gegenstnde (wie z. B. Schraubenzieher,
Mnzen und metallene Objekte) oder mit Wasser gefllte Behlter auf der
Kamera. (Dies kann zur Verletzung von Personen durch Feuer, Stromschlag
oder herunterfallende Gegenstnde fhren.)
7. Die Kamera darf nicht an einem feuchten, staubigen oder ruigen Ort installiert
werden. (Andernfalls besteht die Gefahr eines Brandes oder Stromschlags.)
8. Bei ungewhnlicher Geruchs- oder Rauchentwicklung muss der Betrieb des
Gerts sofort beendet werden. Ziehen Sie unverzglich den Netzstecker und
setzen Sie sich mit einem Kundendienstzentrum in Verbindung.
(Die Weiterbenutzung des Gerts kann zu einem Brand oder elektrischen
Schlag fhren.)
9. Wenn das Gert nicht einwandfrei funktioniert, wenden Sie sich bitte an die
Verkaufsstelle, in der Sie das Gert erworben haben, oder an das nchste
Kundendienstzentrum. Das Gert darf niemals und in keiner Weise selbst
zerlegt oder modifiziert werden. (Samsung bernimmt keine Haftung fr
Probleme, die durch unbefugte Abnderungen oder einen Reparaturversuch
herbeigefhrt sind.)
10. Wasser darf beim Reinigen niemals direkt auf die Gerteteile gelangen.
(Andernfalls besteht die Gefahr eines Brandes oder Stromschlags.)
Die Oberflche kann mit einem trockenen Tuch abgewischt werden.
Verwenden Sie keine Reinigungsmittel oder chemischen Reiniger, da sich
durch solche Mittel die Farbe ablsen und der Oberflchenberzug beschdigt
werden kann.
1-2 1-1
D
Hinweis : Dieses Gert wurde getestet und entsprechend den Grenzwerten als ein
Digitalgert der Klasse B gem Abschnitt 15 der FCC Richtlinien eingestuft.
Diese Grenzwerte wurden festgelegt um einen angemessenen Schutz gegen
gesundheitsgefhrdende Berhrung bei Installation in der Wohnumgebung zu
gewhrleisten. Dieses Gert erzeugt und benutzt elektromagnetische Strahlung und
kann elektromagnetische Strahlung aussenden. Wenn das Gert nicht der Anleitung
entsprechend installiert und in Betrieb genommen wird, kann es zu Strungen bei
der Radiokommunikation kommen.
Eine Strung bei einer bestimmten Installation kann jedoch nicht ausgeschlossen
werden.
Wenn das Gert strende Interferenzen beim Radio- oder Fernsehempfang
verursacht, was durch ein oder Ausschalten des Gerts berprft werden kann,
sollte einer oder mehrere der folgenden Ratschlge befolgt werden:
- Drehen oder versetzen sie die Empfangsantenne.
- Vergrern Sie den Abstand zwischen Gert und Empfnger.
- Schlieen Sie das Gert an eine andere Steckdose an als den Empfnger.
- Wenden Sie sich an den Hndler oder einen erfahrenen Radio- und
Fernsehtechniker und bitten um Hilfe.
Normzulassungen
Vor Inbetriebnahme
Dies ist ein grundlegendes Benutzerhandbuch fr Nutzer der
Speed- Dome Kamera SCC-641(P). Es enthlt alle notwendigen
Hinweise fr den Betrieb der SCC-641(P) von der einfachen
Einfhrung der Bedienungselemente der SCC-641(P) und deren
Funktionen bis hin zu Installationsmethoden im Setup-Men.
Wir empfehlen allen Nutzern der SCC-641(P), dieses Handbuch
vor dem Gebrauch zu lesen, sowohl den erfahrenen Nutzern, die
hnliche Kameras bereits verwendet haben, als auch den
gewhnlichen Nutzern.
Das am hufigsten benutzte Merkmal der Speed-Dome Kamera
SCC-641(P) ist das SCC-641(P) Setup-Men.
Das SCC-641(P) Setup-Men wird im Kapitel 3 : berblick ber
das Setup-Men genau erklrt.
Es ist am sinnvollsten, das Handbuch von vorn bis hinten zu
lesen, aber fr diejenigen, die nur aktuell bentigte Auszge
lesen wollen, sind hier die Kapitelzusammenfassungen.
"Kapitel 1 : berblick ber die SCC-641(P) enthlt eine kurze
Einfhrung in die Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P), ihre
Einzelteile und Funktionen und Schaltereinstellungen.
"Kapitel 2 : Installation der Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P)
erklrt die Installationsanweisung der SCC-641(P) und informiert
ber Vorbereitungen und Randbedingungen der Inbetriebnahme.
"Kapitel 3 : berblick ber das Setup-Men erlutert die
Struktur des Setup-Mens der SCC-641(P) einschlielich einer
ausfhrlichen Erklrung der verfgbaren Funktionen in jedem
Untermen.
"Anhang A : Technische Daten der Speed-Dome Kamera
SCC-641(P)enthlt Produktspezifikationen der SCC-641(P) in
tabellarischer bersicht.
1-4
D
1-3
- SHUTTER 3-10
- AGC 3-11
- WEISSABGL 3-12
- SPEZIAL 3-14
- AUTO FOKUS 3-15
- D-ZOOM 3-15
- AUSGANG 3-15
PRESET 3-16
AUTO MODE 3-18
- Auto PAN 3-18
- PATTERN 3-20
- ALARM PROG 3-21
- WEITERE PROG 3-23
Technische Daten 3-25
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Vor Inbetriebnahme 1-1
Kapitel 1 berblick ber die SCC-641(P) 1-5
Einfhrung in die SCC-641(P) 1-6
Steuerungselemente der SCC-641(P) 1-7
Steuerungselemente Vorderseite 1-7
Steuerungselemente Rckseite 1-8
ADAPTERANSCHLUSS 1-9
ERSTEINSTELLUNG 1-10
Einstellung der RS-422A/RS-485 Abschlsse 1-11
Schaltereinstellung 1-12
Kapitel 2 Installation der SCC-641(P) Installation 2-1
berprfen des Packungsinhalts 2-2
Vorsichtsmanahmen fr Installation und Betrieb 2-3
Vorbereitung der Kabel 2-5
Kabelanschlsse 2-6
Installation der SCC-641(P) 2-7
Kapitel 3 berblick ber das Setup Men 3-1
Aufbau Setup Mens 3-2
Inhalt des KAMERA Block Mens 3-5
- KAMERA ID 3-5
- SYNC 3-6
- ZOOM GESCH 3-6
- AKTIVITAET 3-7
- AUSGANG 3-8
VIDEO PROG MENU 3-9
- BLENDE 3-9
1-6
D
1-5
Einfhrung in die SCC-641 (P)
Die Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) ist eine hochwertige
berwachungskamera mit integriertem ZOOM-Objektiv. Sie kann mit CCTV
in Banken oder Firmengebuden eingesetzt werden, um hchste Sicherheit
zu gewhrleisten.
Die Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) ist eine hochqualitative
berwachungskamera mit x22 Zoom-Objektiv und einem digitalen
10- fach Zoom. Sie kann scharfe Kamerabilder bis zu 220-fach auffangen.
Die Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) hat eine Lichtverstrkung (Low Light
Funktion), die es ermglicht, Aufnahmen zu machen, auch wenn fast kein
Licht vorhanden ist, einen Weiabgleich (White Balance Function), der
natrliche Bilder entsprechend dem Hintergrundlicht korrigiert, einem
Gegenlichtausgleich (Back Light Compensation Function), der ermglicht,
Objekte auch bei intensivem Gegenlicht scharf zu sehen und einen
Auto FoKUS, der eine Anpassung des Fokus an die
Bewegung von Objekten ermglicht. Die Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P)
ist eine Multifunktionskamera, die alle wichtigen Funktionen anderer
berwachungskameras besitzt.
Die Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) besitzt eine Alarmfunktion fr
Gefahrensituationen und ist eine in beliebige Richtungen bewegliche
Kamera. ZOOM-IN und ZOOM-OUT-Funktionen knnen ferngesteuert
werden.
Kapitel 1 : berblick ber die SCC-641(P)
In diesem Kapitel werden die Funktionen der SCC-641(P)
kurz beschrieben. Die Hauptfunktionen,
Steuerungselemente und Schaltereinstellungen werden
erlutert.
1-8
D
1-7
Rckseite Steuerungselemente
Vorderseite
1-10
D
1-9
ADAPTERANSCHLUSS
ERSTEINSTELLUNG
KAMERAADRESSE EINSTELLUNG
Dip Switch setting (Dip-Schalter-Einstellung) ist gleich wie das folgende Beispiel: EX)
KAMERA ADDR: Wenn ihre Ziffer 1 ist, stellen Sie so ein.
Einstellung des Kommunikationsprotokolls.
Benutzen Sie die Ziffern 5 bis 8 PINs von SW501, um das Kommunikationsprotokoll
einzustellen.
Einstellung der Baudrate
Verwenden Sie PIN 3 und 4 von SW501.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
SW500
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
BAUD RATE
4800 BPS
9600 BPS
19200 BPS
38400 BPS
PIN 3
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
PIN 4
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
A : SAMSUNG (SSC-1000) HALF
B : SAMSUNG (SSC-1000) VOLL
PIN5 PIN6 PIN7 PIN8
A OFF OFF OFF OFF
B ON OFF OFF OFF
C OFF ON OFF OFF
D ON ON OFF OFF
E OFF OFF ON OFF
F ON OFF ON OFF
G OFF ON ON OFF
H ON ON ON OFF
I OFF OFF OFF ON
J ON OFF OFF ON
K OFF ON OFF ON
L ON ON OFF ON
M OFF OFF ON ON
N ON OFF ON ON
O OFF ON ON ON
P ON ON ON ON
PIN
Comp
SW501
SW500
(UNTERSEITE)
SIEHE BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
1-12
D
1-11
Schaltereinstellung
Empfnger-adresse
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
SW500-1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SW500-2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW500-3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-5
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-6
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-7
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-8
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Einstellung der RS-422A/RS-485 Abschlsse
Wenn der Controller und RS-422A/RS-485 Buchsen verbunden sind, sollte, wie in der
bersicht dargestellt, der Abschluss entsprechend der Impedanz (des
Scheinwiderstandes) des jeweiligen bertragungsweges eingestellt werden, um Signale
bei groen Entfernungen durch Kontrolle der Reflektionen auf der Leitung
auszugleichen.
<RS-485 Half Duplex Organisation>
n < 128
Termination
SW1-ON
Division
Abschluss: Verwenden Sie PIN-Nummer 1 und 2, Schalten auf ON bedeutet Abschluss.
<RS-422A/RS-485 Full Duplex Organisation>
Division
Division
SW1-ON
SW2-ON
n < 128
VORSICHT
Wenn mehr als eine Kamera auf die gleiche Adresse eingestellt ist,
knnen Kommunikationsprobleme auftreten.
1-14
D
1-13
Empfnger-adresse
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
SW500-1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SW500-2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW500-3
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-5
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-6
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-7
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-8
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Empfnger-adresse
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
SW500-1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SW500-2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW500-3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-4
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-5
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-6
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-7
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-8
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
1-16
D
1-15
Empfnger-adresse
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
SW500-1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SW500-2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW500-3
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-4
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-5
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-7
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-6
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Empfnger-adresse
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
SW500-1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SW500-2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW500-3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-5
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-6
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-7
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
2-2
D
2-1
Vor der Installation
berprfung des Verpackungsinhalts
berprfen Sie bitte, ob alle unten aufgelisteten Teile in der Packung enthalten sind :
SCC-641(P) Haltewinkel
Kamerahalterung
Abdeckungsteile
Kapitel 2 : Installation der SCC-641(P)
In diesem Kapitel werden wichtige Punkte vor der Installation,
Voraussetzungen fr die Installationsumgebung und
Vorsichtsmaregel whrend der Installation der SCC-641(P)
Kameraeinheit beschrieben. Dann wird gezeigt, wie die eigentliche
Installation der SCC-641(P) Kameraeinheit und Kabelanschsse
durchgefhrt werden sollten.
Bedienerhandbuch
2-4
D
2-3
Richten Sie die SCC-641(P) nie zur Sonne aus.
Unabhngig davon, ob die Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) in Betrieb ist
oder nicht, darf sie nie zur Sonne ausgerichtet werden. Seien sie vorsichtig,
wenn Sie die Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) in der Nhe von
Scheinwerferlicht oder hellem Licht oder stark reflektierenden Objekten
verwenden.
Die SCC-641(P) sollte in einer stabilen Umgebung aufgestellt werden.
Zulssige Betriebsbedingungen:
Temperatur : -10C bis +50C (14F bis122F )
Luftfeuchtigkeit: 90% oder weniger
Es sollte eine geeignete Spannung entsprechend den Kenndaten des
Spannungsversorgungsystems der Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P)
verwendet werden.
Leistungsaufnahme : 18W
Spannung : 24VAC, 1.5A
Vorsichtsmassnahmen fr Installation und Betrieb.
Bauen Sie die SCC-641(P) nicht auseinander.
Es besteht die Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlages, wenn die Schrauben oder
das Gehuse entfernt werden. Den Nutzern sei dringend abgeraten, mit den
inneren Teilen der Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) zu hantieren. Wenn ein
ffnen des Gertes erforderlich ist, kontaktieren Sie bitte den Hndler.
Gehen Sie mit der SCC-641(P) sorgsam um.
Auch wenn die Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) ein haltbares Produkt ist,
verlngert sorgsamer Umgang die Lebensdauer und den einwandfreien
Betrieb des Gertes. Vermeiden Sie Ste oder direkte Schlge auf das
Gert, um Beschdigungen zu verhindern. Bedienen und lagern Sie das Gert
sachgerecht.
Setzen Sie die Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) nicht Regen oder
Feuchtigkeit aus und verwenden Sie sie nicht in feuchter Umgebung.
Wenn die Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) mit Wasser in Berhrung kommt,
schalten Sie sie sofort aus und kontaktieren Sie einen Hndler. Feuchtigkeit
kann die Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) beschdigen und erhht die
Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlages.
Verwenden Sie keine scharfen oder aggressiven Reinigungsmittel, um
das Gehuse der SCC-641(P) zu reinigen.
Wenn das Gehuse der Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) verschmutzt ist,
verwenden Sie ein trockenes Tuch, um die Einheit zu reinigen. Verwenden Sie
bei hartnckigem Schmutz ein mildes Putzmittel und reiben Sie vorsichtig.
2-6
D
2-5
Kabelanschlsse
1. Verbinden Sie ein Ende des BNC-Video-Kabels mit dem Videoausgang (VIDEO
OUT).
2., Verbinden Sie dann das andere Ende mit dem Videoeingang des Monitors.
3.Schlieen Sie nun das Netzanschlusskabel an. Verwenden Sie
einenSchraubenzieher, um ein Ende der beiden Leitungen des Netzteils mit dem
Spannungseingang der Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) zu verbinden.
4. Stellen Sie den Schalter am Netzteil auf die verwendete Spannung ein. Stecken Sie
dann den Netzteilstecker in die Steckdose.
5. Verbinden Sie die Fernsteuerung der Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) mit der
externen Steuerung.
Um die Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) zu installieren und in Betrieb zu
nehmen, werden folgende Kabel bentigt:
Netzanschlusskabel
Unten abgebildet sehen Sie das Kabel, das mit dem Spannungsversorgungsnetzteil der
Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) verbunden ist. Die Spannung betrgt 24VAC, die
Stromstrke 1.5A.
Video-Kabel
Das Video-Kabel ist ein BNC-Kabel. Es verbindet den Videoausgang der
Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) mit dem Videoeingang des Monitors.
Vorbereitung der Kabel
2-8
D
2-7
1. [Bild 1] Befestigen Sie den Aufbau an der Decke.
(Beachten Sie bei der Installation die Hhe des Aufbaus.)
* Eingebaut vom Hersteller.
3. [Bild 2] Befestigen Sie den Haltewinkel (BRKT-ANCHOR) an der Decke und
schrauben Sie sie mit 4 Schrauben fest.
Installation der Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P)
[Bild 2]
[Bild 1]
2. Machen Sie an der Stelle, wo die Kamera installiert werden soll, ein Loch in die Decke.
(Das Loch sollte etwa einen Durchmesser von 180 mm haben.)
5. [Bild 5] Stecken Sie den Kameradapter in den Haltewinkel und schrauben Sie ihn mit 4
Befestigungsschrauben (PH M4X8) fest.
[Bild 5]
4. [Bild 3, 4] Verbinden Sie die verschiedenen Kabel mit dem Kameraadapter (siehe
Seite 2-6)
[Bild 4]
[Bild 3]
Lnge des Deckenlochs
Haltewinkel
3-1
D
Kapitel 3: berblick ber das Setup-Men
Dieses Kapitel gibt einen berblick ber das Setup-Men der
Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P). Zuerst wird die allgemeine Struktur
des Setup-Mens erlutert und dann die Funktionen der einzelnen
Mens.
2-9
6. [Bild 6] Stecken Sie passend auf die 3 Lcher an der Rckseite der Kamera das
Verbindungsstck und drehen sie es um etwa 15Grad nach links. (berprfen Sie am
Gerusch, ob das Verbindungsteil eingerastet ist und der Hebelverschluss hlt.)
* Verwenden Sie Schrauben (BH M3XL8), um die Kamera und den Adapter zu befestigen.
[Bild 6]
7. [Bild7] Bringen Sie die Kuppelabdeckung ber der Kuppel an.
[Bild7]
3-3
D
3-2
AUTO MODE AUTO PAN ...
PATTERN PROG 1/2/3
ALARM PROG ALARM PRIORITT PROG ALARM1 1~4
ALARM2 1~4
ALARM3 1~4
ALARM4 1~4
AUSGANG VERL/SICHERN
ALARM EIN PROG ALARM1 AUS/NO/NC
ALARM2 AUS/NO/NC
ALARM3 AUS/NO/NC
ALARM4 AUS/NO/NC
ALARM AUS PROG ALARM1 1~3
ALARM2 1~3
ALARM3 1~3
ALARM4 1~3
AKTIVITAET 1~3
ALARM PATTERN PROG ALARM1 AUS/1~3/HALB1/HALB2/VOLL
ALARM2 AUS/1~3/HALB1/HALB2/VOLL
AKTIVITAET AUS/1~3/HALB1/HALB2/VOLL
AUX AUS KONTROLLE AUS1 AUS/EIN
AUS2 AUS/EIN
AUS3 AUS/EIN
WEITERE PROG AC AUS/6STUNDE/12STUNDE/18STUNDE/24STUNDE
P.P/T EIN/AUS
HOME ZURCK AUS/1~60MIN/2~12STUNDE
HOME POSITION 0~127
AUTO FLIP AUS/EIN
KAM RESET
SPRACHE DEUTSCH
KAMERA KAMERA ID AUS/EIN...
SYNC INT/LINIE...
ZOOM GESCH 1/2/3/4
AKTIVITAET AUS/EIN...
AUSGANG VERL/SICHERN/PRESET
VIDEO PROG BLENDE ALC.../MANU...
SHUTTER AUS/1/100~1/10K/AUTO/FEST
AGC AUS/EIN
WEISSABGL ATW/AWC/MANU...
SPEZIAL AUS/EIN... POSI/NEGA +/-
BIB EIN.../AUS
SPIEGEL AUS/EIN
H-DTL (0)----I--
V-DTL (0)---I---
RUE
AUTO FOKUS AF/MF/EINAF
D-ZOOM AUS/X2~X10
AUSGANG VERL/SICHERN/PRESET
PRESET POSITIONS PROG ...
VIDEO PROG EIN.../AUS
PRESET ID EIN.../AUS
SCAN EIN/AUS
SCHWELLZEIT 1~60S
AUSGANG VERL/SICHERN/LOE
Aufbau des Setup Mens
3-5
D
3-4
Inhalt des KAMERA BLOCK-Mens
Das Kameramen besteht aus dem AMERA PROG.Men und dem VIDEO PROG-Men.
KAMERA ID
Das KAMERA ID-Men legt eine Bezeichnung fr die Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P)
fest, die auf dem Monitor angezeigt wird. Stellen Sie auf dem KAMERA PROG- Men-
bildschirm KAMERA ID auf ON und drcken Sie die [Enter]-Taste. Jetzt sehen Sie das
Untermen zur Festlegung der ID der Kamera SCC-641(P). Die KAMERA ID kann aus
bis zu 12 alphanumerischen Zeichen bestehen, zuzglich einiger Sonderzeichen. Die
eingestellte KAMERA ID kann an eine gewnschte Position platziert werden, indem man
das POSITION-Untermen aufruft.
[Enter]
drcken
bedeutet, es gibt Untermens.
Das oben gezeichnete Diagramm zeigt die allgemeine Struktur des
Setup-Mens. Im nchsten Abschnitt werden die Merkmale des Setup-Mens
erlutert, die Nutzern eine Anpassung der Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P)
an die persnlichen Bedrfnisse ermglichen.
(KAMERA PROG)
KAMERA ID AUS
SYNC INT
ZOOM GESCH 3
AKTIVITAET AUS
AUSGANG VERL
(VIDEO PROG)
BLENDE ALC...
SHUTTER AUS
AGC EIN
WEISSABGL ATW
SPEZIAL AUS
AUTO FOKUS EINAF
D-ZOOM AUS
AUSGANG VERL
(KAMERA PROG)
KAMERA ID EIN...
SYNC INT
ZOOM GESCH 3
AKTIVITAET AUS
AUSGANG VERL
(KAMERA ID)
Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
: ! - + ( ) /
SP SP
POSITION...
RET
SCC-641P...
3-7
D
3-6
AKTIVITAET
Im AKTIVITAET-Men knnen Sie die Bewegungsdetektion einstellen sowie die
Empfindlichkeit und den Bereich der Bewegungsdetektion festlegen. Wenn die
Bewegungsdetektion eingeschaltet ist, kann die Bewegung eines Eindringlings registriert
werden. Wenn die Bewegung registriert wird, wird von der Steuerung ein Alarmsignal
abgegeben.
Wenn Sie ON whlen und [Enter] drcken, erscheint das AKTIVITAET-Untermen. Das
BEREICH-Men, das den Bildschirmbereich festlegt, auf den die Bewegungsdetektion
angewendet werden soll, kann auf PRESET oder BENUTZER eingestellt werden. Wenn das
BEREICHA-Men auf PRESET gestellt ist, wird die Bewegungsdetektion gem der
werkseitig eingestellten Daten der Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) ausgefhrt. Stellen Sie
das ABEREICH A-Men auf BENUTZER und drcken Sie die [Enter]-taste. Nun knnen Sie
die Gre und Lage des Bereichs, auf den die Bewegungsdetektion angewendet werden soll,
selbst whlen. Wenn der Bereich nicht blinkt, knnen Sie die rechts/links/oben/unten-Tasten
verwenden, um die Gre zu verndern und festzulegen. Wenn Sie [Enter] drcken, wenn der
Bereich nicht blinkt, wird er anfangen zu blinken und Sie knnen mit den
rechts/links/oben/unten-Tasten die Position des Bereichs festlegen. Verwenden Sie die [Enter]-
Taste und die rechts/links/oben/unten-Tasten um die Position und Gre des
Bewegungsdetektionsbereichs festzulegen. Wenn Sie nochmals [Enter] drcken, verlassen
Sie das BEREICH-Einstellungsmen. Verwenden Sie das EMPFINOLICH-Men, um die
Empfindlichkeit der Bewegungsdetektion einzustellen. Je hher der Wert eingestellt wird, desto
empfindlicher ist die Bewegungsdetektion.
die [links, rechts, oben,

unten] Tasten benutzen
[Enter]
drcken
Die Bewegungsdetektion arbeitet nicht bei folgenden Einstellungen: niedriger SHUTTER,
PRESET, SCAN, PATTERN MODE oder JOYSTICK.
SYNC
Im SYNC-Men kann die vertikale Synchronisation
eingestellt werden. Von der Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-
641(P) untersttze vertikale Synchronisationssignale sind
der INT-Modus, der durch eine SCC-641(P) interne Uhr
erzeugt wird, und der LINIE-Modus, der die vertikale
Synchronisation durch die von auen angelegte
Spannungsfrequenz regelt.
Whlen Sie LINIE und drcken Sie die [Enter]-Taste. Jetzt erscheint das LINIE LOCK-
Untermen, wo Sie die Phase des LINIE LOCK einstellen knnen. Sie knnen das
PHASE-Men des LINIE LOCK-Untermens verwenden, um beliebige Phasen
einzustellen.
ZOOM GESCH
Im ZOOM GESCH-Men knnen Sie die
Geschwindigkeit des Zooms (Tele/ Weitwinkel)
einzustellen. Verwenden Sie die rechts/links-Tasten im
ZOOM GESCH-Men, um die Geschwindigkeit
auszuwhlen.
1: Vergrerung x22 dauert etwa 17 Sekunden
geringste Geschwindigkeit
2: Vergrerung x22 dauert etwa 10 Sekunden
geringe Geschwindigkeit
3: Vergrerung x22 dauert etwa 6 Sekunden hohe
Geschwindigkeit
4: Vergrerung x22 dauert etwa 3 Sekunden hchste
Geschwindigkeit.
[Enter]
drcken
(KAMERA PROG)
KAMERA ID AUS
SYNC LINIE...
ZOOM GESCH 3
AKTIVITAET AUS
AUSGANG VERL
(KAMERA PROG)
KAMERA ID AUS
SYNC LINIE...
FARBE S/W FARBE
ZOOM GESCH 3
AKTIVITAET AUS
AUSGANG VERL
(LINIE LOCK)
PHASE ( 000) ---- I ----
RUE
(KAMERA PROG)
KAMERA ID AUS
SYNC LINIE...
FARBE S/W FARBE
ZOOM GESCH 3
AKTIVITAET AUS
AUSGANG VERL
(KAMERA PROG)
KAMERA ID AUS
SYNC INT
ZOOM GESCH 3
AKTIVITAET EIN...
AUSGANG VERL
(AKTIVITAET)
BEREICH PRESET...
EMPFINDLICH MITTEL
RUE
GROESSE
POSITION
GROESSE
POSITION
3-9
D
3-8
VIDEO PROG-Men
BLENDE
Das Video-Ausgangslevel des Monitors kann durch das BLENDE-Objektiv abhngig vom
einfallenden Licht geregelt werden. Das Video-Ausgangslevel kann im ALC-Men (Auto
Light Compensation) eingestellt werden. Das ffnen und Schlieen des Iris-Objektivs
kann im MANU-Men von Hand eingestellt werden.
GLK (Untermen des ALC/MANU-Mens)
Bei gewhnlichen Kameras strt starkes Hintergrundlicht die Klarheit der Objekte und
lsst sie dunkel erscheinen. Bei der Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) kann das
Problem des Gegenlichts gelst und ein klares Bild erzeugt werden, wenn man GLK
(Back Light Compensation), ein Untermen des ALC/MANU-Mens, einstellt.
ALC
Whlen Sie ALC im BLENDE-Men und drcken Sie die [Enter]-Taste. Im Untermen
erscheint nun die Einstellung fr das Video-Ausgangslevel und fr GLK. Das
Video-Ausgangslevel kann im PEGEL-Item eingestellt werden unter Verwendung der
rechts/links-Tasten. Wenn Sie GLK auf ON einstellen, wird der Gegenlichtausgleich auf
den im BEREICH-Men festgelegten Bereich angewendet. Der Bildschirmbereich, auf
den der Gegenlichtausgleich angewendet werden soll, kann auf PRESET oder
BENUTZER eingestellt werden. Wenn das BEREICH-Men auf PRESET eingestellt ist,
wird der Gegenlichtabgleich entsprechend der voreingestellten Werte durchgefhrt.
Wenn das BEREICH-Men auf BENUTZER eingestellt wird und die [Enter]-Taste
gedrckt wird, kann der Nutzer den Bereich fr die Anwendung des Gegenlichtabgleichs
selbst bestimmen.
Wenn der Bereich nicht blinkt, knnen Sie die rechts/links/oben/unten-Tasten
verwenden, um die Gre zu verndern und festzulegen. Wenn Sie [Enter] drcken,
wenn der Bereich nicht blinkt, wird er anfangen zu blinken und Sie knnen mit den
rechts/links/oben/unten-Tasten die Position des Bereichs festlegen. Verwenden Sie die
[Enter]-Taste und die rechts/links/oben/unten-Tasten um die Position und Gre des
Gegenlichtabgleichbereichs festzulegen. Wenn Sie nochmals [Enter] drcken, verlassen
Sie das BEREICH-Einstellungsmen.
[Enter]
drcken
AUSGANG
Das AUSGANG-Men wird zum Beenden des KAMERA PROG-Mens der
Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) und zum Zurckkehren in das Haupt-Men
verwendet.
- VERL: Ignoriert alle Einstellungsnderungen und stellt die gespeicherten Daten
wieder her.
- SICHERN: Speichert alle Einstellungsnderungen
- PRESET: Ignoriert alle Einstellungsnderungen und stellt die werkseitig eingestellten
Werte wieder her.
(KAMERA PROG)
KAMERA ID AUS
SYNC LINIE...
FARBE S/W FARBE
ZOOM GESCH 3
AKTIVITAET AUS
AUSGANG VERL
(VIDEO PROG)
BLENDE ALC...
SHUTTER AUS
AGC EIN
WEISSABGL ATW
SPEZIAL AUS
AUTO FOKUS EINAF
D-ZOOM AUS
AUSGANG VERL
(ALC)
BEREICH PRESET...
GLK AUS
PEGEL ( 0)----I ----
RUE
3-11
D
3-10
Wenn Sie die rechts/links-Tasten kontinuierlich drcken, erscheint die Geschwindigkeit in
der folgenden Reihenfolge.
AUS 1/100(1/120)1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000
AUTOX48 AUTOX64 AUTOX96 AUTOX128 AUS
FEST X2 - FEST X4 FEST X6 FEST X8 FEST X12 FEST X16
FEST X24FEST X32 FEST X48 FEST X64 FEST X96 FEST X128
AGC
Im AGC-Men (Automatic Gain Control) knnen Sie eine automatische Verstrkung fr
schlechte Beleuchtungsverhltnisse je nach Beleuchtungsbedingungen einstellen. Um
die Verstrkung automatisch zu steuern, stellen Sie das AGC-Men auf AUS, fr
manuelle Steuerung auf EIN. Wenn das SHUTTER-Men auf AUTO-low-speed-Shutter
eingestellt ist, kann die Einstellung im AGC-Men nicht verndert werden.
MANU
Wenn das BLENDE-Item auf MANU eingestellt wird, erscheint das Untermen zum
manuellen ffnen und Schlieen der Iris. Mit den rechts/links-Tasten im PEGEL-Item
kann die Iris manuell eingestellt werden.
die [links, rechts, oben,

unten] Tasten benutzen
SHUTTER
Im SHUTTER-Men knnen der High-Speed-Electric-Shutter, der
AUTO-Low-Speed-Shutter der Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) sowie der
FEST-Low-Speed-Shutter eingestellt werden. Der High-Speed-Electric-Shutter untersttzt 7
verschiedene Geschwindigkeiten von 1/120 bis 1/10K Sekunde.
Der AUTO-Low-Speed-Shutter und der FEST Low-Speed-Shutter untersttzen 12
verschiedene Geschwindigkeiten von Vergrerungen 2x bis 128x. Der Low-Speed-Shutter
setzt die Shutter-Geschwindigkeit herunter, um ein schwach beleuchtetes Objekt klar zu
sehen. Um die Geschwindigkeit des Shutters automatisch der Helligkeit anzupassen, whlen
Sie den AUTO-Low-Speed-Shutter. Wenn Sie die Geschwindigkeit des Shutters fest
vorgeben wollen, whlen Sie FEST. Die Zahlen hinter AUTO und FEST sind die Anzahl der
gespeicherten Felder. Je grer die Zahl der Felder, desto langsamer ist der Shutter. Ein
ruhiger Bildschirm ist in diesem Fall sehr viel klarer.
Ein bewegtes Objekt dagegen erscheint verschwommen.
[Enter]
drcken
GROESSE
POSITION
GROESSE
POSITION
(VIDEO PROG)
BLENDE MANU...
SHUTTER AUS
AGC EIN
WEISSABGL ATW
SPEZIAL AUS
AUTO FOKUS EINAF
D-ZOOM AUS
AUSGANG VERL
(VIDEO PROG)
BLENDE MANU...
SHUTTER AUS
AGC EIN
WEISSABGL ATW
SPEZIAL AUS
AUTO FOKUS EINAF
D-ZOOM AUS
AUSGANG VERL
(VIDEO PROG)
BLENDE MANU...
SHUTTER AUS
AGC EIN
WEISSABGL ATW
SPEZIAL AUS
AUTO FOKUS EINAF
D-ZOOM AUS
AUSGANG VERL
(MANUEL)
PEGEL (00) ---- I ----
RUE
3-13
D
3-12
WEISSABGL
Das WEISSABGL-Men stellt sicher, dass weies Licht unter beliebigen
Farbtemperaturbedingungen auf normal abgeglichen wird. Wenn das WEISSABGL-
Men auf ATW Modus eingestellt ist, wird der Weiabgleich automatisch den
Farbtemperaturbedingungen angepasst. Wenn das WEISSABGL-Men auf den
AWC-Modus eingestellt ist, kann der Weiabgleich entsprechend der Farbtemperatur
einmalig durchgefhrt werden, indem man auf die [Enter]-Taste drckt, whrend man ein
weies Blatt vor die Kamera hlt.
Wenn das WEISSABGL-Men auf MANU Modus eingestellt ist, kann der Nutzer den
Weiabgleich der aktuellen Beleuchtungssituation anpassen.
- 3200 K : Farbtemperatur auf 3200 K
- 5600 K : Farbtemperatur auf 5600 K
- BENUTZER: Nutzer: Einstellen des geeigneten Wertes im Rot und Blau-Diagramm
MANU: Whlen Sie das MANU-Item und drcken Sie die [Enter]-Taste, um
dasUntermen anzuzeigen, in dem der manuelle Weiabgleich eingestellt
werden kann. Verwenden Sie die rechts/links-Tasten um 3200K, 5600K oder
den BENUTZER-Modus im PRESET-Men auszuwhlen.
[Enter]
drcken
WEISSABGL
Licht wird allgemein in Farbtemperaturen angegeben und in Kelvin-Einheiten
gemessen.(k).
Die allgemeine Farbtemperatur von verschiedenen Lichtverhltnissen ist unten
angegeben.
blauer Himmel
regnerisch
bewlkt
teils bewlkt
sonnig
Leuchtstofflampenlicht
Glhbirnenlicht
Kerzenlicht
Halogenlampenlicht
1000K
2000K
3000K
4000K
5000K
6000K
7000K
8000K
9000K
10000K
(VIDEO PROG)
BLENDE ALC...
SHUTTER AUS
AGC EIN
WEISSABGL MANU...
SPEZIAL AUS
AUTO FOKUS EINAF
D-ZOOM AUS
AUSGANG VERL
(AWB/MANUEL)
PRESET AUS(BENUTZER)..
ROT ( 00) ----I ----
BLAU ( 00) ----I ----
RUE
3-15
D
3-14
AUTO FOKUS
Im AUTO-FOKUS-Men kann die Fokussierung auf AF, MF oder EINAF eingestellt werden.
- AF: Mit dem AUTO FOKUS-Modus kann kontinuierlich aufgenommen und automatisch
fokussiert werden. Eine manuelle Focus-Einstellung ist nicht erforderlich.
- MF: Im MANUAL FOKUS-Modus kann der Nutzer den Fokus manuell einstellen.
- EINAF: Im OEINAF-Modus der Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) arbeitet derAutofokus
nur whrend des Bewegens/Anhaltens. Wenn sich die Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-
641(P) nicht bewegt, entspricht die Einstellung dem MF-Modus. Wenn sie sich
bewegt/anhlt, entspricht die Einstellung dem AF-Modus.
Verwenden Sie die links/rechts-Tasten, um AF, MF oder EINAF im AUTO FOKUS-Men
auszuwhlen.
D-ZOOM
Im D-ZOOM-Men knnen Sie die digitale Zoom-Vergrerung einstellen.
Sie knnen eine Vergrerung von AUS bis 10fach whlen.
Wenn das digitale Zoom auf 10fach eingestellt ist, ergibt sich zusammen mit dem Zoom-
Objektiv eine Vergrerung von bis zu 220fach.
Verwenden Sie die rechts/links-Tasten, um die Vergrerung im D-ZOOM-Men
auszuwhlen.
AUSGANG
Wie AUSGANG-Funktion im KAMERA Men.
SPEZIAL
Im SPEZIAL-Men knnen POSI/NEGA, BIB, Mirror und H-DTL und V-DTL festgelegt
werden.
- POSI/NEGA: Das Video-Signal wird normal/ungekehrt ausgegeben.
- BIB (Picture in Picture): Wenn der Digitale Zoom aktiviert ist, wird der auf 1/16tel
reduzierte Bildschirm angezeigt.
- SPIEGEL: Umkehrung des Video-Ausgangssignals
- H-DTL (Horizontal Detail Level)
- V-DTL (Vertikal Detail Level)
Whlen Sie EIN und drcken Sie [Enter], um das SPEZIAL-Untermen mit den
Spezialfunktionen aufzurufen.
Um die Funktionen auszuwhlen verwenden Sie die rechts/links-Tasten und whlen
ein Item aus. Whlen Sie BIB-Men ON und drcken Sie [Enter]. Verwenden Sie die
rechts/links/oben/unten-Tasten, um die Position des BIB festzulegen.
BIB Screen
[Enter]
drcken
[Enter]
drcken
BIB arbeitet nicht im low-speed-Shutter-Modus. Wenn Mirror eingestellt ist, wirkt es
sich nicht im BIB-Fenster aus.
(SPEZIAL)
POSI/NEGA +/-
BIB AUS
SPIEGEL AUS
H-DTL ( 0)----I --
V-DTL ( 0)---I ---
RUE
(VIDEO PROG)
BLENDE ALC...
SHUTTER OFF
AGC EIN
WEISSABGL ATW
SPEZIAL EIN...
AUTO FOKUS EINAF
D-ZOOM AUS
AUSGANG VERL
(SPEZIAL)
POSI/NEGA +/-
BIB EIN...
SPIEGEL AUS
H-DTL ( 0)----I ----
V-DTL ( 0)----I ----
RUE
(VIDEO PROG)
BLENDE ALC...
SHUTTER OFF
AGC EIN
WEISSABGL ATW
SPEZIAL EIN...
AUTO FOKUS EINAF
D-ZOOM AUS
AUSGANG VERL
(VIDEO PROG)
BLENDE ALC...
SHUTTER OFF
AGC EIN
WEISSABGL ATW
SPEZIAL EIN...
AUTO FOKUS EINAF
D-ZOOM AUS
AUSGANG VERL
(VIDEO PROG)
BLENDE ALC...
SHUTTER OFF
AGC EIN
WEISSABGL ATW
SPEZIAL EIN...
AUTO FOKUS EINAF
D-ZOOM X10
AUSGANG VERL
3-17
D
3-16
POSITIONS PROG
Drcken Sie ausgehend von POSITIONS PROG ...
die [Enter]-Taste, um in das Men zur Einstellung von S/N
und ZOOM/FOKUS zu gelangen. Drcken Sie [Enter], um in
das nchsthhere Men zu gelangen.
VIDEO PROG
Dies ist die Bildschirmeinstellung fr jedes PRESET. Schauen Sie bei den Erklrungen
im VIDEO PROG-Men nach.
PRESET ID
Dies ist die Funktion zur Einstellung der ID fr jedes
PRESET. Es kann mit 12 Zeichen eingestellt werden
unter Verwendung der rechts/links/oben/unten-Tasten.
Die ID-Positionierung kann im Untermen POSITION
festgelegt werden.
SCAN
Diese Funktion stellt eine SCAN-Bewegung ein oder
aus.
Wenn SCAN auf EIN gestellt ist, wird eine
SCAN-Bewegung ausgefhrt, bei AUS nicht.
SCHWELLZEIT
Diese Funktion stellt die Verweildauer bei der PRESET-Position whrend der
SCAN-Bewegung ein. Die Verweildauer kann von 1 bis 60 sec eingestellt werden.
AUSGANG
UERL : Speichert die Einstellungen nicht und fhrt zum hheren Men zurck.
SICHERN : Speichert die Einstellungen und fhrt zum hheren Men zurck.
LOE : Lscht die Einstellungen und stellt die DEFAULT-Werte wieder her. Es fhrt
dann zum hheren Men zurck.
PRESET
Insgesamt sind 128 Voreinstellungen zugnglich einschlielich der Auswahl von
PAN/TILT-Einstellung, Zoom/Fokus und Bildschirm- und Aufnahmeeinstellungen.
(0~127)
Unter den 128 Voreinstellungen :
PRESET 0 : HOME POSITION (Ausgangsposition), PRESET 1 : ALARM 1, PRESET 2
: ALARM 2, PRESET 3 : ALARM 3, PRESET 4 : ALARM 4, PRESET 5 : Satz
voreingestellter Daten fr MOTION.
[Enter]
drcken
[Enter]
drcken
* * HAUPTEMEN * *
KAMERA...
VIDEO PROG...
PRESET...
AUTO MODE...
ALARM PROG...
WEITERE PROG...
(PRESET KARTE)
0 H 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29
30 31 RUE
ID:PRESET 0
PRESET NR.0
POSITIONS PROG...
VIDEO PROG AUS
PRESET ID EIN...
SCAN EIN
SCHWELLZEIT 2 S
AUSGANG VERL
PRESET NR.0
POSITIONS PROG ...
VIDEO PROG AUS
PRESET ID EIN...
SCAN EIN
SCHWELLZEIT 2 S
AUSGANG VERL
PRESET NR.0 ID
Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
: ! - + * ( ) /
SP SP
POSITION...
RUE
PRESET 0....
PRESET NR.0
S/N PROG
ZOOM FOKUS PROG
3-19
D
3-18
PROG ENDE!
ENDE PROG
ber ENDE PROG und Drcken der Enter-Taste
gelangen Sie in das ENDE PROG-Einstellungs-Men.
Stellen Sie die S/N Position ein und drcken Sie
[Enter], um zum hheren Men zurckzukehren.
RICHTUNG
Bestimmen Sie die Bewegungsrichtung von START bis ENDE (PAN location standard).
rechts: links:
ENDLOS
Dies ist die Funktion fr eine 360o-Drehung, die nur fr die eingestellte Verweildauer
(SCHWELL ZEIT) in der START- und ENDE-Position anhlt.
GESCHWINDIGK
Hier wird die Bewegungsgeschwindigkeit eingestellt. Sie kann von Stufe 1 bis 64 gewhlt
werden.
SCHWELLZEIT
Hier wird die Verweildauer an der START- und ENDE-Position eingestellt.
PROG START!
AUTO MODE
Der AUTO-Modus enthlt die Funktionen AUTO PAN und PATTERN.
AUTO PAN
Nach Auswahl zweier Positionen (S/N) fr Start und Ziel wird ein kontinuierlicher
Schwenk in der angegebenen Geschwindigkeit gefahren.
START PROG
Ausgehend von START PROG... gelangen Sie durch
Drcken der [Enter]-Taste in das
START PROG-Einstellungs-Men. Nach Auswahl der
Position fr S/N, drcken Sie die Enter-Taste, um zum
hheren Men zurckzukehren.
[Enter]
drcken
[Enter]
drcken
* * HAUPTEMEN * *
KAMERA...
VIDEO VIDEO...
PRESET...
AUTO MODE...
ALARM PROG...
WEITERE PROG...
(AUTO MODE)
AUTO PAN ...
PATTERN PROG 1...
RUE
AUTOPAN
START PROG ...
ENDE PROG ...
RICHTUNG LINKS
ENDLOS OFF
GESCHWINDIGK SCHRITT20
SCHWELLZEIT 2 S
AUSGANG VERL
3-21
D
3-20
ALARM PROG
Zur Verfgung stehen 4 ALARM ENTs und 3 ALARM AUSs. Das Gert kann einen
Alarminput von einem externen Sensor empfangen oder im Rahmen der PRESET oder
PATTERN-Funktion ein Alarmsignal geben.
Es erkennt das ankommende Alarmsignal als ein Alarmsignal, wenn es lnger als 150
ms andauert. Der Zeitpunkt fr die Auslsung des Alarms hngt von der Einstellung der
Verweildauer (SCHWELLZEIT) im PRESET und PATTERN-Modus ab.
ALARM PRIORITT PROG
Legt die Prioritt der 4 Alarminputs fest. Die voreingestellte
Prioritt ist:
ALARM 1: 1, ALARM 2: 2, ALARM 3: 3, ALARM 4: 4.
Wenn zwei ALARM-Signale gleicher Prioritt gleichzeitig
angesprochen werden, gilt die voreingestellte Prioritt.
Whrend der ALARM luft wird keine Bewegung detektiert.
ALARM ENT PROG
Stellen Sie den TYPE auf NO (Normal Open),
NC(Normal Close) oder AUS entsprechend den
Merkmale des angeschlossenen SENSORS.
[Enter]
drcken
PATTERN
Dies ist eine Wiederholungsfunktion, mit der die MANUAL-Funktionen wie S/N,
ZOOM und FOKUS fr 30 Sekunden aufgezeichnet werden.
PATTERN1 PROG
PATTERN kann auf 1 bis 3 gesetzt werden. Whlen Sie 1, 2 oder 3 mit der rechten
oder linken Taste im PATTERN PROG aus und drcken Sie [ENTER], um in das
Einstellungsmen zu gelangen. Von dem Zeitpunkt an, wenn PATTERN 1 PROG
eingestellt ist, werden die manuellen Bewegungen innerhalb der nchsten 30
Sekunden gespeichert. Nach Ablauf der 30 Sekunden gelangt man wieder ins hhere
Men. Wenn die Einstellung vor Ablauf der 30 Sekunden beendet werden soll, drcken
Sie die [ENTER]-Taste.
[Enter]
drcken
[Enter]
drcken
* * HAUPTEMEN * *
KAMERA...
VIDEO PROG...
PRESET...
AUTO MODE...
ALARM PROG...
WEITERE PROG...
(AUTO MODE)
AUTO PAN ...
PATTERN PROG 1...
RUE
* * HAUPTEMEN * *
KAMERA...
VIDEO PROG...
PRESET...
AUTO MODE...
ALARM PROG...
WEITERE PROG...
(ALARM PROG)
ALARM PRIORITT PROG..
ALARM EIN PROG..
ALARM AUS PROG..
ALARM PATTERN PROG..
AUX AUS KONTROLLE..
RUE
ALARM PRIORITT
ALARM1 1
ALARM2 2
ALARM3 3
ALARM4 4
AUSGANG VERL
ALARM EIN
ALARM1 AUS
ALARM2 AUS
ALARM3 AUS
ALARM4 AUS
AUSGANG VERL
3-23
D
3-22
ALARM AUS PROG
Jeder Alarminput entspricht einem der 3
Alarmoutputs. <Alarm 3 ist reserviert fr das Relais
OUT>.
ALARM PATTERN PROG
Hier werden PATTERN-Bewegungen bei Alarminputs
festgelegt.Wenn ALARM eingegeben ist, besteht
folgende Beziehung:ALARM 1 ist Input fr PRESET 1
ALARM 2 ist Input fr PRESET 2 ALARM 3 ist Input fr
PRESET 3ALARM 4 ist Input fr PRESET 4und
AKTIVITAET ist Input fr PRESET 5.Wenn der ALARM
durchgefhrt wird, bleibt die Kamera in der dem Alarm
entsprechenden PRESET-Position fr die Verweildauer
(SCHWELLZEIT) und geht dann in die dem ALARM
zugeordnete PATTERN-Bewegung ber.
AUX AUS KONTROLLE
OFF im Setup-Men bedeutet, das PATTERN wir nicht ausgefhrt. Die anderen
Einstellungen bedeuten PATTERN1,2 PATTERN2,3PATTERN3,
kontinuierliche Bewegung von HALF1PATTERN1+PATTERN2,motion continue de
HALB2PATTERN2+PATTERN3und kontinuierliche Bewegung von VOLL
PATTERN1+PATTERN2+PATTERN3 .
Diese Einstellung bestimmt, ob die
ALARM AUS-Funktion dauerhaft arbeitet oder nur dann,
wenn der ALARM eingestellt ist.Wenn die Einstellung
AUS gewhlt wird erfolgt die Abgabe des Alarmsignals
nur, wenn der ALARM aktiv ist (Active Low). Wenn die
Einstellung EIN gewhlt wird, arbeitet ALARM AUS
immer, unabhngig von der ALARM-Einstellung.
EINSTELLUNG DER ZEIT FR DEN HOME ZURCK:
AUS: Ausschalten der HOME ZURCK-Funktion
AUS 1 MIN 2 MIN 3 MIN ~ 60MIN ~12STUNDE
AUTO FLIP
Wenn die Neigung der Kamera bei Verwendung des Joysticks die 90-Grenze erreicht,
schwenkt die Kamera automatisch um 180 und zeigt den gegenberliegenden Bereich.
Dies entspricht dem Effekt einer Ausdehnung des Neigungswinkels auf einen Bereich
von 180.
HOME POSITION
Sie knnen die HOME POSITION unter den voreingestellten Positionen mit den
Nummern 0 bis 127 auswhlen.
WEITERE PROG
AC(AUTOKALIBRIERUNG)
Die Auto Kalibrierung EIN/AUS Funktion. SCC-C641(P) hat eine Auto Kalibrierung
Funktion, um die Genauigkeitsgrad von OBJEKTIV und PAN/TILT zu verbessern.
Wenn keine Benutzers Taste whrend der bestimmten Zeit, die von Benutzer eingestellt
worden ist, eingegeben wird, wird das Zeichen A.C. auf dem Schirm angezeigt, und die
Initialisierung des OBJEKTIVS und des PAN /TILT wird automatisch durchgefhrt.
P.P/T(PROPORTIONAL PAN/TILT)
Es ist eine Funktion, die bei der MANUELL PAN/TILT Operation je nach
der ZOOM Vergrerung automatisch die PAN/TILT Geschwindigkeit
ndert. Wenn PROPORTIONAL P/T als ON eingestellt wird, wird sich im
ZOOM WIDE schnell und im ZOOM TELE langsam bewegt, obwohl es
gleiche MANUELLE Operation ist.
HOME ZURCK
Wenn keine Eingabe oder keine Vernderungen fr eine gewisse Zeit erfolgen, kehrt die
Kamera automatisch in ihre Ausgangsposition zurck.
Die HOME-Position kann vom Men HOME POSITION aus zugewiesen werden.
ALARM AUS
ALARM1 1
ALARM2 2
ALARM3 3
ALARM4 1
AKTIVITAET 2
AUSGANG VERL
ALARM PATTERN
ALARM1 AUS
ALARM2 AUS
ALARM3 AUS
ALARM4 AUS
AKTIVITAET AUS
AUSGANG VERL
AUX AUS KONTROLLE
AUS1 AUS
AUS2 AUS
AUS3 AUS
AUSGANG VERL
3-25
D
3-24
KAM RESET
Mit KAM RESET werden alle bisher vorgenommenen Einstellungen gelscht und die
werkseitigen Standardeinstellungen wiederhergestellt.
Bei Auswahl von KAM RESET erscheint die Meldung "KAMERA RESET?".
Whlen Sie BE ENDEN, um zum Bildschirmmen zurckzukehren, oder OK, um die
werkseitigen Standardeinstellungen wiederherzustellen.
G Seien Sie mit der Durchfhrung von KAM RESET vorsichtig, da dadurch alle
Einstellungen gelscht werden.
Technische Daten
SCC-641
Spezifikation
- Ein Krper-Kombi-Kuppelkamera mit Zoomobjektiv
- AC 24 10% (60Hz 0.3Hz)
- 18W
- NTSC Standard Farbsystem
- 1/4 inch IT CCD
- 768(H) x 494(V)
- 525 Zeilen, 2:1 Interlace
- INT/LINIE LOCK
- 480 TV LINES
- 52dB (AGC OFF)
- 0.3 Lux (Sense UP X4)
(0.01 Lux)
- ATW/AWC oder manuell
(3200 K, 5600 K, R/B GAIN Court)
- Videoausgang: 1.0Vp-p, 75Ohm/BNC gemischt
- Ein Krper: 22x Zoomobjektiv
- Brennweite: 3.6 bis 79.2mm
- Apertur: F1.6(Wide), F3.8(Tele)
- Autofokus
- PAN Reichweite: 360 ohne Begrenzung
- Voreingestellte PAN Geschwindigkeit: Max. 240/sec
- Manuelle PAN Geschwindigkeit:0.8 bis 90/sec (64 Stufen)
- TILT-Reichweite: 0 bis 90
- Voreingestellte TILT Geschwindigkeit: Max. 150/sec
- Manuelle TILT Geschwindigkeit: 0.8 bis 45/sec (64Stufen)
- Tele/Weitwinckel (Zoom), Nah/Fern (Fokus)
Blende Open/Close, S/N
- Alarmeingang: 4 IN (5mA Sink)
- Alarmausgang: 3 OUT (Open Collector: 2 DC24V 40mA
Max, Relay: 1, NO, NC, COM 2A 30VDC, 0.5A 125VAC
Max
- -10C ~ +50C (14F ~ 122F)
- Max. 90%
- Kuppel : 147 (),
Gehuseumfang: 159.5( ) x176(H)(Adapter:23.5(H)mm)
- 2Kg
NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Artikel
Produkttyp
Spannungsversorgung
Leistungsaufnahme
Signalsystem
Bildwandler
Effektive Bildelemente
Abtastmodus
Abtastrate
Synchronisationsmodus
Auflsung
Signal/Rauschabstand
Min. Lichtstarke des Ohjekts
Farbtemperatur
Ausgangssignal
Objektiv
PAN Funktion
TILT Funktion
REMOTE CONTROL
ALARM
Operation Humidity
SIZE
Weight
3-27
D
3-26
Achtung
Das Urheberrecht dieses Handbuchs gehrt Samsung Electronics
Co., Ltd.
Ohne vorherige Genehmigung von Samsung Electronics darf es weder
elektronisch, mechanisch, hrbar noch durch eine andere Methode
vervielfltigt werden.
Dieses Handbuch wird bei Produktverbesserungen gendert.
Technische Daten
SCC-641P
Spezifikation
- Ein Krper-Kombi-Kuppelkamera mit Zoomobjektiv
- AC 24 10% (50Hz 0.3Hz)
- 18W
- PAL Standard Farbsystem
- 1/4 inch IT CCD
- 752(H) x 582(V)
- 625 Zeilen,, 2:1 Interlace
- INT/LINIE LOCK
- 480 TV LINES
- 52dB (AGC OFF)
(0.01 Lux)
- ATW/AWC oder manuell
- Videoausgang: 1.0Vp-p, 75Ohm/BNC gemischt
- Ein Krper: 22x Zoomobjektiv
- Brennweite: 3.6 bis 79.2mm
- Apertur: F1.6(Wide), F3.8(Tele)
- Autofokus
- PAN Reichweite: 360 ohne Begrenzung
- Voreingestellte PAN Geschwindigkeit: Max. 240/sec
- Manuelle PAN Geschwindigkeit:0.8 bis 90/sec (64 Stufen)
- TILT-Reichweite: 0 bis 90
- Voreingestellte TILT Geschwindigkeit: Max. 150/sec
- Manuelle TILT Geschwindigkeit: 0.8 bis 45/sec (64Stufen)
- Tele/Weitwinckel (Zoom), Nah/Fern (Fokus)
Blende Open/Close, S/N
- Alarmeingang: 4 IN (5mA Sink)
- Alarmausgang: 3 OUT (Open Collector: 2 DC24V 40mA
Max, Relay: 1, NO, NC, COM 2A 30VDC, 0.5A 125VAC
Max
- -10C ~ +50C (14F ~ 122F)
- Max. 90%
- Kuppel : 147 (),
Gehuseumfang: 159.5() x176(H)(Adapter:23.5(H)mm)
- 2Kg
NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Artikel
Produkttyp
Spannungsversorgung
Leistungsaufnahme
Signalsystem
Bildwandler
Effektive Bildelemente
Abtastmodus
Abtastrate
Synchronisationsmodus
Auflsung
Signal/Rauschabstand
Min. Lichtstarke des Ohjekts
Farbtemperatur
Ausgangssignal
Objektiv
PAN Funktion
TILT Funktion
REMOTE CONTROL
ALARM
Operation Humidity
SIZE
Weight
F
SmartDome Camera
SCC-641(P)
Manuel dinstruction
F
Prcautions de scurit
Lobjectif des prcautions de scurit est dassurer lutilisation correcte de ce
produit afin dloigner tout risque et tout dgt la proprit. Assurez-vous
de bien observer toutes les prcautions.
* La section des prcautions de scurit est rpartie en deux volets, soit
Avertissements et Mises en garde, comme indiqu ci-dessous:
Avertissement: Ne pas tenir compte dun avertissement risque de causer
des blessures graves, voire mortelles.
Mise en garde: Ne pas tenir compte dune mise en garde peut entraner
des blessures corporelles ou des dgts la proprit.
Les avertissements vous
signalent des risques
susceptibles de causer des
blessures ou la mort.
Les mises en garde vous signalent
des risques susceptibles de causer
des blessures ou des dgts la
proprit.
6. Ne placez jamais dobjets conducteurs (p. ex., un tournevis, des pices de
monnaie, des objets mtalliques) ni de contenants deau sur la camera.
(Cela pourrait causer des blessures corporelles en raison dun incendie, dune
dcharge lectrique ou de la chute dun objet.)
7. Ninstallez pas la camera dans un emplacement plein de suie, de poussire ou
dhumidit. (Cela pourrait provoquer un incendie ou une dcharge lectrique.)
8. Si la camera dgage une odeur trange ou de la fume, dbranchez
immdiatement le cordon dalimentation et contactez le centre de soutien
technique. (Une sollicitation continue de lappareil dans ces conditions pourrait
provoquer un incendie ou des dcharges lectriques.)
9. Si ce produit cesse de fonctionner correctement, communiquez avec votre
revendeur ou le centre dentretien de votre localit. Ne dmontez ni ne modifiez
jamais ce produit. (Samsung ne saurait tre tenue pour responsable des
problmes techniques dcoulant dune modification ou dune tentative de
rparation non autorises.)
10. Lorsque vous nettoyez le produit, veillez ne pas vaporiser deau directement
sur les composants du produit.
(Cela pourrait provoquer un incendie ou une dcharge lectrique.)
Nettoyez la surface au moyen d'un chiffon doux. Nutilisez jamais de
dtersifs ni de nettoyants chimiques. Cela pourrait dcolorer le produit ou
endommager son fini.
Mise en garde
1. Ne laissez pas tomber dobjets sur le produit ni ne le soumettez de forts
coups. Ninstallez pas le produit dans un endroit o il pourrait subir de
fortes vibrations ou des interfrences magntiques.
2. Ninstallez pas le produit dans un endroit o il fait trs chaud (plus de
50C/122F), trs froid (moins de 10 C/14 F) ou trs humide.
(Cela pourrait provoquer un incendie ou une dcharge lectrique.)
3. vitez les endroits o le produit est expos des rayons directs du soleil
ou une source de chaleur, telle quun radiateur ou un appareil de
chauffage.
(Le non-respect de cette consigne pourrait prsenter un risque dincendie.)
4. Si vous dsirez changer dendroit dinstallation de la camera, assurez-vous
de couper le courant avant de procder au dmontage et la rinstallation.
5. Installez le produit dans une aire bien ventile.
6. En cas dorage, dbranchez le cordon lectrique de la prise murale.
(Le non-respect de cette prcaution pourrait provoquer un incendie ou
endommager le produit.)
Avertissement
1. Assurez-vous dutiliser uniquement ladaptateur fourni avec le produit.
(Lutilisation dun adaptateur autre que celui fourni peut endommager le
produit ou causer un incendie ou des dcharges lectriques.)
2. Avant de brancher le cordon dalimentation et les cbles de signal, vrifiez
dabord les bornes extrieures. Reliez les cbles des signaux dalarme
leur borne respective. Branchez ladaptateur CA sur la prise CA et
ladaptateur CC sur la prise CC tout en tenant compte de la bonne polarit.
(La connexion incorrecte la source dalimentation peut endommager le
produit ou causer un incendie ou des dcharges lectriques.)
3. Ne branchez jamais plus dune camera sur un seul adaptateur.
(Le dpassement de la capacit de charge risque de gnrer une chaleur
anormale au point de causer un incendie.)
(La chute de la camera peut causer des blessures corporelles.)
4. Branchez le cordon dalimentation sur la prise murale. Assurez-vous que la
connexion est solidement fixe.
(Une mauvaise connexion peut constituer le risque dun incendie.)
5. Lorsque vous installez la camera au mur ou au plafond, assurez-vous
quelle soit y fixe solidement et de faon scuritaire. (La chute de la
camera peut causer des blessures corporelles.)
1-2 1-1
F
Cet quipement a t valu et trouv observer les limites pour une classe B le dispositif
digital,conformment partie 15 des rgles FCC. Ces limites sont conues pour fournir la
protection rsonnable contre linterface nuisible dans une installation rsidentielle.Cet
quipement produit,utilise et peut mettre lnergie de frquence radio et si non install et
employ conformment des instructions, peut causer linterfrence nuisible aux
communications de radio.
Cependant,il ny a aucune garantie que cette interfrence narrivera pas dans une installation
particulire. Si cet quipement cause linterfrence nuisible la radio ou la rception de
tlvision, qui peut tre dcid en tournant lquipement en ON et OFF, lutilisateur est
encourag pour essayer de corriger linterfrence par une ouplus des mesures suivantes.
- Rorientez-vous de transfrer lantenne de rception.
- Augmentez la sparation entre lquipement et le rcepteur.
- Joignez lquipement dans une sortie sur le circuit diffrent de cela auquel le rcepteur
est connect.
- Consultez le revendeur ou un technicien de TV de radio expriment pour laide.
Homologation des normes
Avant lutilisation
Cest un mode demploi de base pour lutilisateur de SCC-641(P).
Il contient toutes les instructions ncessaires pour employer le
SCC-641(P) dune introduction simple de la location de contrle et
fonctions de SCC-641(P) pour mthodes d installation dans le menu
dinstallation.
Nous recommandons tous les utlisateurs de SCC-641(P) de
lutilisateur avanc qui a employ la camera semblable auparavant
lutilisateur gnral de lire le mode demploi avant utilisation.
La particularit le plus frquemment employe dans SCC-641(P)
serait le Menu dinstallation de SCC-641(P).
Le Menu dinstallation de SCC-641(P) est exprim en dtail dans le
chapitre 3 Vue densemble de Menu dinstallation.
Ce manuel dinstruction est le meilleur employ quand on lit du dbut
jusqu la fin, mais pour les utilisateurs voulant lire seulement la
partie ils ont besoin ici est le chapitre Rsums.
Chapitre 1. Vue densemble inclut une introduction brve de
SCC-641(P), noms de partie et fonctions et Arrangement de
commutation.
Chapitre 2. SCC-641(P) Installation explique les procdures
dinstallation de SCC-641(P) et fournit prparation et exigences
denvironnement dinstallation
Chapitre 3. Vue densemble de menu dinstallation prsente la
structure du menu dinstallation pour le SCC-641(P) incluant une
explication dtaille des fonctions excutes dans chaque sous-menu.
Annexe SCC-641(P) Spcifications de produit contient
spcifications du produit SCC-641(P) dans les catgories dtailles.
1-4
F
1-3
- SHUTTER 3-10
- CAG 3-11
- BAL BLANCS 3-12
- SPECIAL 3-14
- AUTO FOCUS 3-15
- D-ZOOM 3-15
- SORITIE 3-15
PRESET 3-16
MODE AUTO 3-18
- PAN AUTO 3-18
- RONDE 3-20
PROG ALARME 3-21
AUTRE PROG 3-23
Annexe Spcifications du produit 3-25
" Table des matires "
Avant lutilisation 1-1
Chapitre 1 SCC-641(P) Vue densemble 1-5
SCC-641(P) Introduction 1-6
SCC-641(P) location de commandes 1-7
Contrles de location- avant 1-7
Contrles de location-arrire 1-8
Connexion dadaptateur 1-9
Arrangement initial 1-10
Arrangement de RS-422A RS 485 dune terminaison 1-11
Arrangement de commutateur 1-12
Chapitre2 SCC-641(P) Installations 2-1
Vrification de contenu de paquet 2-2
Prcautions pour installation et utilisation 2-3
Prparation du cble 2-5
Connexion du cble 2-6
Installation de SCC-641(P) 2-7
Chapitre3 Vue densemble de menu dinstallation 3-1
Contenu de menu dinstallation 3-2
La structure gnrale de menu de camra bloc 3-5
- Camra ID 3-5
- Sync 3-6
- VITE ZOOM 3-6
- DET MOUVE 3-7
- SORITIE 3-8
MENU DE PROG VIDEO 3-9
- IRIS 3-9
1-6
F
1-5
SCC-641(P) Introduction
Le SCC-641(P) est le produit que la meilleure excution de lentille de zoom a
interrp la camra de surveillance.
Le SCC-641(P) est la camra de surveillance de haute qualit utilisant la
lentille de zoom x22 et zoom digital IC,il peut attraper des images claires
jusqu 220 fois.
Le SCC-641(P) a fonction de lumire basse qui permet de prendre des
dcharges dans lenvironnement o il ny a presque aucune lumire,Fonction
dquilibre blanc qui corrige limage naturelle selon les feux de fond,Fonction
de compensation de Rtro-clairage qui permet des objets dtre vu
clairement mme sous contexte brillant clairage conditions et Fonction de
Auto Focus qui le permet de se concentrer selon le mouvement de lobjet. Il
est la camra de malfonction qui a toutes les fonctions importantes dautres
camras de surveillance.
Le SCC-641(P) utilise la fonction dalarme pour alerter situations et camra
mouvant dans la direction que vous voulez,Fonctions de zoom-in et
zoom-out peuvent tre contrles distance.
Chapitre 1 SCC-641(P) vue densemble
Dans ce chapitre nous introduisons brivement SCC-641(P)
et montrerons fonctions principales,contrle de Location et
arrangement de commutateur.
1-8
F
1-7
Arrire Connexion dadaptateur
Avant
1-10
F
1-9
Connexion dadaptateur
Arrangement de commutateur
Installation dadresse de camera
Dip Switch setting est mme comme lexemple suivant.
EX) CAMERA ADDR : quand il est le nombre 1, mettez comme suit.
Arrangement de protocole de communication.
Utilisez les nombres 5-8 PIN de SW501 pour mettre Protocole de communication.
Configuration du dbit en bauds
Utilisez les BROCHES 3 et 4 du SW501.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
SW500
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
BAUD RATE
4800 BPS
9600 BPS
19200 BPS
38400 BPS
PIN 3
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
PIN 4
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
B : SAMSUNG (SSC-1000) MAXIMUM
PIN5 PIN6 PIN7 PIN8
A OFF OFF OFF OFF
B ON OFF OFF OFF
C OFF ON OFF OFF
D ON ON OFF OFF
E OFF OFF ON OFF
F ON OFF ON OFF
G OFF ON ON OFF
H ON ON ON OFF
I OFF OFF OFF ON
J ON OFF OFF ON
K OFF ON OFF ON
L ON ON OFF ON
M OFF OFF ON ON
N ON OFF ON ON
O OFF ON ON ON
P ON ON ON ON
PIN
Comp
SW501
SW500
(VUE DE DESSOUS)
REPORTEZ-VOUS AU
GUIDE DUTILISATION
1-12
F
1-11
Adressedercepteur
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
SW500-1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SW500-2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW500-3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-5
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-6
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-7
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-8
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Arrangement de RS-422A/ RS-485 dune terminaison
Comme on le montre dans la carte de structure,quand le contrleur est joint, il doit tre
termin selon la particularit de cble dimpdence sur chaque fin de la ligne de
transmission pour transfrer les signaux dans la longue distance en contrlant la
rflexion des signaux au plus bas.
<Organisation de Moiti Duplex RS485>
n < 128
Terminaison
SW1-ON
Division
Terminaison : en utilisant les numros 1 et 2 PIN, tournez ON et il sera termin.
<Organisation de Plein Duplex RS-422A/RS-485>
Division
Division
SW1-ON
SW2-ON
n < 128
Caution
Si plus quune camra est mis de mme dadresse,lerreur de
communication peut tre arrive.
1-14
F
1-13
Adressedercepteur
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
SW500-1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SW500-2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW500-3
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-5
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-6
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-6
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-8
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Adressedercepteur
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
SW500-1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SW500-2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW500-3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-4
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-5
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-6
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-7
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-8
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
1-16
F
1-15
Adressedercepteur
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
SW500-1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SW500-2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW500-3
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-4
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-5
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-7
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-6
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Adressedercepteur
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
SW500-1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SW500-2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW500-3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-5
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-6
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-7
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
2-2
F
2-1
Avant linstallation
Vrification de contenu de paquet
Vrifiez sil vous plat que tous les composants inscrits ci-dessous sont inclus dans le
paquet.
SCC-641(P)
Ancre de parenthse
Dtenteur de camra
Corps de couverturea
Chapitre 2 SCC-641(P) Installation
Dans ce chapitre nous regarderons sur les points de contrle avant
linstallation, installation exigences environnements, et prcautions
pendant linstallation du SCC-641(P).Aprs cela,nous montrerons
linstallation relle du SCC-641(P) et connexions de cble.
Manueldinstruction
2-4
F
2-3
Ne faites jamais SCC-641(P) vers le soleil.
Si le SCC-641(P) est dans lutilisation ou non,ne faites jamais face
SCC-641(P) vers le soleil.Utilisez avec prcaution en faisant fonctionner le
SCC-641(P) aux alentours de rayons de projecteur ou dautres feux brillants
et lumire refltant lobjet.
Le SCC-641(P) doit tre fonctionn dans un environnement stable.Des
conditions de fonctionnement acceptables sont inscrites ci-dessous.
Temprature : -10C ~ +50C(14F~ 122F)
Niveau dhumidit :90% ou moins
Lnergie lectrique approprie doit tre employe selon les
spcifications de SCC-641(P) systme dalimentation dnergie.
Energie consomme :18W
ntre lectrique :24VAC,1.5A
Prcautions pour installation et utilisation.
Nessayez pas de dmonter le SCC-641(P)
Il y a un danger de dcharge lectrique si les vis ou la couverture sont
enlevs.Nous recommendons aux utilisateurs dviter de traiter la partie
intrieure.Si cela devient ncessaire pour inspecter lintrieur ,entrez sil vous
plat en contact avec un distributeur.
Traitez-le SCC-641(P) avec soin.
Bien que le SCC-641(P) soit le produit durable,le traitement soigneux du
produit allongera sa dure de service et empche des checs.Evitez de
trembler ou directement impact de la camra pour empcher dgts au produit
et traiter et garder correctement.
Nexposez pas le SCC-641(P) la pluie ou lhumidit ou ne faites pas
fonctionner en place humide.
Si le SCC-641(P) vient contact avec leau ,teignez-vous le commutateur
lectrique immdiatement et entrez en contact avec un distributeur.Lhumidit
peut endommager le SCC-641(P) et augmenter le danger de dcharge
lectrique.
Nemployez pas de dtergents forts ou dtergents abrasifs pour nettoyer
le corps de SCC-641(P).
Si le SCC-641(P) devient sale, utilisez le tissu sec pour nettoyer lunit.
Dans le cas o la salet est dure denlever, employez un dtergent doux et
essuyez doucement.
2-6
F
2-5
Connexion de cble
1. Dabord,connectez une fin du connecteur de cble vido BNC au terminal de
production vido.(VIDEO OUT)
2. Ainsi,connectez lautre fin du connceteur au terminal dentre vido du moniteur.
3.Maintenant,branchez le cble dadaptateur lectrique. Utilisez un tournevis pour
visser une partie des deux lignes dadaptateur lectrique au terminal dentre
lectrique.
4. Ajustez le commutateur ci-dessous la tension approprie.Ainsi connectez la prise
de ladaptateur lectrique au connecteur lectrique.
5. Connectez le terminal de tlcommande de SCC-641(P) et le contrleur externe.
Pour installer et utliser le SCC-641(P),les cbles suivants doivent tre
prpars.
Cble dadaptateur lectrique
Le cble connect au terminal dentre lectrique de SCC-641(P) est montr ci-dessous
avec une tension value de 24VAC et ampacit de 1.5A.
Cble vido
Le cble de SCC-641(P) est le cble BNC pour connceter le terminal de production
vido au terminal dentre vido du moniteur.
Prparation des cbles
2-8
F
2-7
1. [Figure1] Installez la structure sur le plafond.
(Rfrez-vous la rfrence dinstallation pour la longueur de la structure.)
* Encastr par le constructeur de la structure.
3. [Figure2] Assemblez le BRKT-ANCHOR sur le plafond et vissez les 4 boulons.
Installation de SCC-641(P)
[Figure 2]
[Figure 1]
2. Faites un trou dans le plafond o la camra doit tre installe.(Le trou doit tre environs
180)
5. [Figure5] Correspondez la BRKT-ancre et ladaptateur de camra et utilisez 4
tournevis pour les assembler.
[Figure 5]
4. [Figure3,4] Joignez les cbles divers ladaptateur de camra.(Voir les pages 2-6)
[Figure 4]
[Figure 3]
Longueur de trou de plafond
3-1
F
Chapitre3 Vue densemble de menu dinstallation
Dans ce chapitre,nous parcourirons le menu dinstallation de
SCC-641(P).Dabord nous regarderons la structure complte du menu
dinstallation et les fonctions de chaque menu.
2-9
6. [Figure6] Correspondez les 3 trous sur le dos de la camra et le connecteur et tournez-la
gauche environs 15degrs. (Examinez le systme de verouillage (Locking)et le verouillage
de levier(Lever-Locking) est en place.)
* Utilisez les tournevis(BH M3XLB) pour joindre la Camra et lAdaptateur pour quils ne se
dplacent pas.
[Figure 6]
7. [[Figure 7] Assemblez le dme-couverture sur le dme.
[Figure 7]
CONNECTEUR
DME-COUVERTURE
3-3
F
3-2
MODE AUTO PAN AUTO ...
PROG RONDE 1/2/3
PROG ALARME PR PRIORITE ALARME ALARME1 1~4
ALARME2 1~4
ALARME3 1~4
ALARME4 1~4
SORTIE QUITTER/SAUVER
PR ENT ALARME ALARME1 OFF/NO/NF
ALARME2 OFF/NO/NF
ALARME3 OFF/NO/NF
ALARME4 OFF/NO/NF
PR SORT ALARME ALARME1 1~3
ALARME2 1~3
ALARME3 1~3
ALARME4 1~3
MOUVE 1~3
PR RONDE ALARME ALARME1 OFF/1~3/DEMI1/DEMI2/PLEIN
ALARME2 OFF/1~3/DEMI1/DEMI2/PLEIN
MOUVE OFF/1~3/DEMI1/DEMI2/PLEIN
CONTRLE SORTIE AUX SORTIE1 OFF/ON
SORTIE2 OFF/ON
SORTIE3 OFF/ON
AUTRE PROG AC OFF/6HEURE/12HEURE/18HEURE/24HEURE
P.P/T OFF/ON
RET ORIGINE OFF/1~60MIN/2~12HEURE
POS ORIGINE 0~127
RETOURNEMENT OFF/ON
RAZ CAM
LANGAGE FRANIS
CAMERA CAMERA ID OFF/ON...
SYNC INT/LIGNE...
VITE ZOOM 1/2/3/4
DET MOUVE OFF/ON...
SORTIE QUITTER/SAUVER/PRESET
PROG VIDEO IRIS ALC.../MANU...
SHUTTER OFF/1/120~1/10K/AUTO/FIXE
CAG OFF/ON
BAL BLANCS BA/BM/MANU...
SPECIAL OFF/ON... POSI/NEGA +/-
PIP ON.../OFF
MIROIR OFF/ON
DTL H (0)----I--
DTL V (0)---I---
RET
AUTO FOCUS AF/MF/UNAF
D-ZOOM OFF/X2~X10
SORTIE QUITTER/SAUVER/PRESET
PRESET PROG POSITION ...
PROG VIDEO ON.../OFF
PRESET ID ON.../OFF
BALAYAGE ON/OFF
VIT CYCLE 1~60S
SORTIE QUITTER/SAUVER/EFFACE
Contenu de menu dinstallation
3-5
F
3-4
Contenu de menu de bloc de camera
Menu de camra consiste en menu de PROG CAMERA et Menu de PROG VIDEO.
Camera ID
Le menu de CAMERA ID assigne lID au SCC-641(P) pour tre montr sur le moniteur
connect. Sur lcran de menu de PROG CAMERA,slectionnez CAMERA ID ON et
pressez [ENTER].Vous verrez le sous-cran pour choisir finalement lID du
SCC-641(P).La CAMERA ID peut avoir jusqu 12 caractres alphanumrique,avec
plusieurs caractres spciaux.La camra assigne ID peut tre plac nimporte quel
emplacement dsirable sur lcran en utlisant le sub-menu de Location .
Pressez
[Enter]
* " ... " signifie quil y a sub-menus.
La diagramme montre ci-dessus illustre la structure complte du menu
dinstallation.Dans cette section,une description des particularits de menu
dinstallation permet aux utlisateurs de SCC-641(P) de faonner leurs
besoins personnels.
(PROG CAMERA)
CAMERA ID OFF
SYNC INT
VITE ZOOM 3
DET MOUVE OFF
SORTIE QUITTER
(PROG VIDEO)
IRIS ALC...
SHUTTER OFF
CAG ON
BAL BLANCS BA
SPECIAL OFF
AUTO FOCUS UNAF
D-ZOOM OFF
SORTIE QUITTER
(PROG CAMERA)
CAMERA ID ON
SYNC INT
VITE ZOOM 3
DET MOUVE OFF
SORTIE QUITTER
(CAMERA ID)
: ! - + ( ) /
SP SP
POSITION...
RET
SCC-641P.....
3-7
F
3-6
DET MOUVE
Dans le DET MOUVE,vous pouvez choisir la fonction de MOUVEMENT Detection,Motion
Detection Sensitivity et le secteur de Motion Detection. Si la fonction de Motion Detection est
mis,le mouvement dun intrus peut tre dtect . Quand le mouvement est dtect,il fait
ressortir le signal dAlarme du contrleur.
Choisissez ON et pressez [ENTER] vous verrez le sub-menu DET MOUVE .Le menu de
secteur,le secteur de lcran o la fonction de Motion Detection va tre appliqu,peut tre mis
comme PRESET ou USER. Si le menu ZONE est mis PRESET,la fonctionde Motion
Detection va tre appliqu la partie de base du dfaut dusine dfini davance de
SCC-641(P). Mettez le menu de ZONE User et pressez [ENTER],lutilisateur peut choisir la
taille du secteur et lemplacement o la fonction de Motion Detection doit tre applique.
Quand le secteur ne clignote pas,vous pouvez utiliser les clefs[Left,Right,Up,Down] pour
dplacer et mettez la taille.Si vous pressez [ENTER] quand la secteur ne clignote pas, il
commencera clignoter et vous pouvez utiliser les clefs [Left,Right,Up,Down] pour mettre la
position du secteur. Utilisez [ENTER] et les clefs [Left,Right,Up,Down] pour mettre la position
et la taille du secteur Motion Detection. Si vous pressez [ENTER] encore une fois, vous
pouvez quitter le menu darrangement ZONE. Utilisez le menu SENSIBILIT pour metre la
sensibilit de dtection de mouvement. Plus haut il est mis, plus sensible les mouvements de
dtection se dplacent.
Utilisez les clefs

[Gauche,Droite,En haut
,En bas] Keys
Pressez
[Enter]
* La fonction de Motion Detection ne fonctionne pas en traitant SHUTTER lent,
BALAYAGE, RONDE MODE ou JOYSTICK .
SYNC
Dans le menu de SYNC, la synchronization verticale peut
tre slecte.
Le signal de synchronization verticale support par le
SCC-641(P) est le mode INT par montre dedans
SCC-641(P) et le mode LIGNE ajustant la synchronisation
la frquence de ligne lectrique extrieur.
Choisissez LIGNE et pressez [ENTER] .Vous pouvez voir le sub-menu de LIGNE
BLOC o vous pouvez ajuster la phase de LIGNE BLOC.
Vous pouvez utiliser le menu PHASE du submenu de Ligne de Serrure(Line Lock) pour
assigner autant de PHASE comme vous voulez.
VITE ZOOM
Dans le menu VITE ZOOM ,vous pouvez choisir la
vitesse de la clef de ZOOM(Tl / Large)
Utilisez les clefs [Left] ou [Right] dans le menu de
VITE ZOOM pour choisir la vitesse.
1 : Agrandissement x 22 prend environs 17 secondes
comme la vitesse la plus lente.
2 : Agrandissement x22 prend environs 10secondes
comme la vitesse lente.
3 : Agrandissement x22 prend environs 6 secondes
comme la vitesse rapide.
4 : Agrandissement x22 environs 3 secondes comme la
vitesse la plus rapide.
Pressez
[Enter]
(PROG CAMERA)
CAMERA ID OFF
SYNC LIGNE...
VITE ZOOM 3
DET MOUVE OFF
SORTIE QUITTER
(PROG CAMERA)
CAMERA ID OFF
SYNC LIGNE...
VITE ZOOM 3
DET MOUVE OFF
SORTIE QUITTER
(LIGNE BLOC)
PHASE ( 000) ----I ----
RET
(PROG CAMERA)
CAMERA ID OFF
SYNC LIGNE...
VITE ZOOM 3
DET MOUVE OFF
SORTIE QUITTER
(PROG CAMERA)
CAMERA ID OFF
SYNC INT
VITE ZOOM 3
DET MOUVE ON...
SORTIE QUITTER
(DET MOUVE)
ZONE PRESET...
SENSIBILIT MOYEN
RET
TAILLE
POSITION
TAILLE
POSITION
3-9
F
3-8
MENU DE PROG VIDEO
IRIS
Le niveau de production vido du moniteur peut tre contrl par la taille dIris selon le
niveau de la lumire entrante. Le niveau de production vido peut tre mis dans le menu
ALC(Compensation dclairage automatique). Louverture et la fermeture de la lentille
dIris peuvent tre mis manuellement dans le menu MANU.
CJOUR (Sub-menu des menus ALC/Manu)
Avec camra conventionnelle,lclairage fort de fond se heurte la clart dobjets en les
faisant sombre. Dans le SCC-641(P),larrangement du CJOUR (Compensation de
Rtro-clairage ) le problme de rtro-clairage et vous donne un cran clair.
ALC
Choisissez lALC de litem IRIS.,et pressez [ENTER] et mettez le sub-menu au niveau
de production vido et CJOUR va tre montr. Le niveau de production vido peut tre
mis dans litem de niveau en utilisant les clefs[ Left,Right]. Mettez le menu CJOUR ON
et la fonction de Compensation de Rtro-clairage est appiqu aux secteurs dcran de
menu de ZONE. Le secteur de lcran o Compensation de Rtro-clairage doit tre
appliqu peut tre mis avec les items PRESET ou UTIL. Si le menu ZONE est mis
PRESET, la fonction de Compensation de Rtro-clairage est applique aux dfauts
initiaux dusine du SCC-641(P) .Si le menu ZONE est mis UTIL et [ENTER] est
appuy, lutilisateur peut choisir le secteur appliqu de la fonction de compensation de
rtro-clairage.
Quand le secteur ne clignote pas,vous pouvez utiliser les clefs [Left,Right,Up,Down] pour
dplacer et mettre la taille. Si vous pressez [ENTER] quand la secteur ne clignote pas,il
commencera de clignoter et vous pouvez utiliser la clef [Left,Right,Up,Down] pour mettre
la position du secteur. Utilisez [ENTER] et les clefs [Left,Right,Up,Down] pour mettre la
position et la taille du secteur Motion Detection. Si vous pressez [ENTER] encore une
fois,vous quitterez le menu darrangement ZONE.
Pressez
[Enter]
SORITIE
Le menu SORITIE est employ pour quitter le menu de jeu de camra de SCC-641(P)
et retourner au MENU PRINCIPAL.
- QUITTER : ignore linformation change et reconstitue linformation garde.
- SAUVER : garde linformation de la condition darrangement du menu.
- PRESET : ignore linformation change et reconstitue les dfauts initiaux dusine du
menu.
(PROG CAMERA)
CAMERA ID OFF
SYNC LIGNE...
VITE ZOOM 3
DET MOUVE OFF
SORTIE QUITTER
(PROG VIDEO)
IRIS ALC...
SHUTTER OFF
CAG ON
BAL BLANCS BA
SPECIAL OFF
AUTO FOCUS UNAF
D-ZOOM OFF
SORTIE QUITTER
(ALC)
ZONE UTIL...
CJOUR OFF
NIVEAU (0) ----I ----
RET
3-11
F
3-10
Si vous pressez les clefs Left/ Right continuellement,la vitesse appartra dans loredre
suivant.
OFF 1/100(1/120) 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000
FIXE X2FIXE X4 FIXE X6 FIXE X8 FIXE X12 FIXE X16
FIXE X24FIXE X32 FIXE X48 FIXE X64 FIXE X96 FIXE X128
CAG
Dans le menu de CAG(Contrle de gain automatique),vous pouvez mettre le gain
automatiquement quand la brillance de lcran est filme moins que la norme dans
conditions dclairage bas.Pour contrler automatiquement GAIN,mettez le menu CAG
ON ou mettez-le OFF pour contrle manuel.Si le menu SHUTTER est mis lobturateur
de vitesse bas automatique,la valeur du menu CAG peut tre ne pas change.
MANU
Si litem IRIS est mis MANU,le sous-cran ouvrir et fermer lIris manuellement va
tre montr. En utilisant les clefs [Left,Right] dans litem de niveau, vous pouvez mettre
larrangement de manuel dIris.
Utilisez les clefs

[Gauche,Droite,En haut
,En bas] Keys
SHUTTER
Dans le menu SHUTTER, lobturateur lectrique ultra-rapide et lobturateur de vitesse basse
Automatique de SCC-641(P) et lobturateur de vitesse bas FIXE peut tre mis. La haute
vitesse de lobturateur lectrique soutient 7 vitesses diffrentes de 1/100 1/10000 de la
seconde. Lobturateur de vitesse bas automatique et lobturateur lectrique de vitesse bas
FIXE soutiennent 12 vitesses diffrentes dagrandissement 2x 128x. Lobturateur de
vitesse basse est la fonction qui met lobturateur de vitesse bas pour voir clairement lobjet
film dans lclairage bas . Pour ralentir automatiquement la vitesse de lobturateur en
sentant la brillance de la lumire, mettez lobturateur de vitesse bas Automatique. Si
lutilisateur veut choisir la vitesse de lobturateur, mettez-la FIXE. Le nombre aprs Auto et
Fix est le nombre des champs gards. Plus grand le nombre des champs,plus lentement la
vitesse dobturateur arrive,ainsi lobjet tait dans le mouvement ce serait flou.
Pressez
[Enter]
TAILLE
POSITION
TAILLE
POSITION
(PROG VIDEO )
IRIS MANU...
SHUTTER OFF
CAG ON
BAL BLANCS BA
SPECIAL OFF
AUTO FOCUS UNAF
D-ZOOM OFF
SORTIE QUITTER
(MANUAL)
NIVEAU (00)---- I ----
RET
(PROG VIDEO )
IRIS ALC...
SHUTTER OFF
CAG ON
BAL BLANCS MANU
SPECIAL OFF
AUTO FOCUS UNAF
D-ZOOM OFF
SORTIE QUITTER
(PROG VIDEO )
IRIS ALC...
SHUTTER OFF
CAG ON
BAL BLANCS MANU
SPECIAL OFF
AUTO FOCUS UNAF
D-ZOOM OFF
SORTIE QUITTER
3-13
F
3-12
BAL BLANCS
Le menu de BAL BLANCS assure que ce blanc est calibr normalement dans nimporte
Quelle condition colore de temprature.Quand le menu de BAL BLANCS est mis au
mode BA,lquilibre blanc est automatiquement spcifi selon la temprature colore. En
cas darrangement du menu de BAL BLANCS mode BM, presser[ENTER] en ayant un
papier blanc devant la camra serait de mettre automatiquement lquilibre blanc
conformment la temprature colore seulement un temps.
Si le menu de BAL BLANCS est mis au mode manuel,lutilisateur peut mettre lquilibre
blanc en tenant compte de lillumination actuelle.
- 3200 K : mettre la temprature colore 3200K
- 5600K :mettre la temprature colore 5600K
- User(lutilisateur) : mettre la valeur approprie dans les graphes rouge
(red)et bleu(blue).
MANU: Choisissez litem MANU et pressez [ENTER], le sub cran o vous pouvez
choisir White Balance manuel va tre montr
Utilisez les clefs Droite /Gauche pour choisir 3200 K ou le mode UTIL dans le menu
PRESET.
Pressez
[Enter]
BAL BLANCS
Les feux sont gnralement dnots comme des tempratures colores et exprims
dans les units de Kelvin(K).
On montre la temprature colore de lumire gnrale ci-dessous.
Ciel bleu
Pluvieux
nuageux
en partie nuageux
ensoleill
lampe fluorescente
lampe de tungstne
lueur dune bougie
lampe dhalogne
1000K
2000K
3000K
4000K
5000K
6000K
7000K
8000K
9000K
10000K
(PROG VIDEO )
IRIS ALC...
SHUTTER OFF
CAG ON
BAL BLANCS MANU...
SPECIAL OFF
AUTO FOCUS UNAF
D-ZOOM OFF
SORTIE QUITTER
(ABB/MANUEL)
PRESET OFF(UTIL)...
ROUGE ( 00) ---- I ----
BLEU ( 00) ---- I ----
RET
3-15
F
3-14
AUTO FOCUS
Dans le menu AUTO FOCUS, la mthode Focus peut tre mis AF,MF,ou UNAF.
- AF : Avec le mode AUTO FOCUS, vous pouvez contrler continuellement lcran et il peut
se concentrer automatiquement. Il se concentrera automatiquement ainsi lentre de
clef de Focus nest pas ncessaire.
- MF : dans le mode MANUAL FOCUS,lutilisateur ajuste le Focus manuellement.
- UNAF : dans le mode UNAF le SCC-641(P) automatique se concentre suelement en se
dplaant/sarrtant. Quand le SCC-641(P) ne se dplace pas il est le mme que
le mode MF et quand il est dplac/arrt, il est le mme que le mode AF.
Utilisez les clefs left/ right pour choisir AF,MF ou UNAF dans le menu AUTO FOCUS.
D-ZOOM
Dans le menu D-ZOOM, vous pouvez choisir lagrandissement de Zoom Digital. Vous
pouvez choisir lagrandissement de OFF 10 fois.Quand Zoom Digital est choisi 10
fois, il est Zoom optique pour 22 fois la taille ainsi la camra peut filmer jusqu 220 fois.
Utilisez les clefs [left,right] pour choisir lagrandissement dans le menu de D-ZOOM.
SORITIE
Il est le mme que la fonction de du menu de PROG CAMERA .
SPECIAL
Dans le menu SPECIAL,POSI/NEGA,PIP,MIRIOR, et niveau de dtail vertical et
horizontal peuvent tre ajusts.
- POSI/NEGA :le signal de production vido est produit normale/inverse.
- PIP(Picture dans Picture) : Quand le ZOOM Digital est activ, le 1/16 cran rduit
au minimum va tre montr.
- Mirror(miroir) : changer compltement le signal de production vido.
- DTL H : ajuster le niveau de dtail horizontal.
- DTL V : ajuster le niveau de dtail vertical.
Choisissez On et pressez [ENTER], le sousmenu SPECIAL choisir les fonctions
spciales va tre montr.
Pour choisir les fonctions ,utilisez les clefs left /right pour choisir un item. Dans le menu
PIP,choisissez ON et pressez[ ENTER] . Utilisez les clefs [ left,right,up,down] pour
mettre la location de PIP.
PIP Screen
Pressez
[Enter]
Pressez
[Enter]
PIP ne fonctionne pas dans le SHUTTER MODE de vitesse basse.
Quand le miroir est fonctionn, le miroir ne fonctionne pas dans la fentre PIP.
(PROG VIDEO )
IRIS ALC...
SHUTTER OFF
CAG ON
BAL BLANCS BA
SPECIAL ON...
AUTO FOCUS UNAF
D-ZOOM OFF
SORTIE QUITTER
(SPECIAL)
POSI/NEGA +/-
PIP OFF
MIROIR OFF
DTL H ( 0) ---- I --
DTL V ( 0) --- I ---
RET
(SPECIAL)
POSI/NEGA +/-
PIP ON...
MIROIR OFF
DTL H ( 0) ---- I ----
DTL V ( 0) ---- I ----
RET
(PROG VIDEO )
IRIS ALC...
SHUTTER OFF
CAG ON
BAL BLANCS BA
SPECIAL ON...
AUTO FOCUS UNAF
D-ZOOM OFF
SORTIE QUITTER
(PROG VIDEO )
IRIS ALC...
SHUTTER OFF
CAG ON
BAL BLANCS BA
SPECIAL ON...
AUTO FOCUS UNAF
D-ZOOM OFF
SORTIE QUITTER
(PROG VIDEO )
IRIS ALC...
SHUTTER OFF
CAG ON
BAL BLANCS BA
SPECIAL ON...
AUTO FOCUS UNAF
D-ZOOM X10
SORTIE QUITTER
3-17
F
3-16
PROG POSITION
De PROG POSITION pressez [ENTER] pour entrer
dans PAN /TILT, FOCUS /ZOOM SET cran pour mettre
lemplacement PAN/ TILT et la condition FOCUS /ZOOM
,alors pressez [ENTER] pour retourner au menu plus haut.
PROG VIDEO
Cest lcran mettant la fonction pour chaque PRESET. Rfrez-vous lexplication sous
le menu de PROG VIDEO.
PRESET ID
Cest la fonction dinstallation dID pour chaque
PRESET.ID peut tre mis jusqu 12 caractres en
utilisant les clefs left,right,up,down.
Lemplacement ID peut tre mis dans le sousmenu
POSITION
BALAYAGE
Cette fonction sinstalle pour le mouvement ou aucun
mouvement dans le mouvement de BALAYAGE .
Quand il est PRESET ON il inclut le mouvement
BALAYAGE et OFF aucun mouvement.
VIT CYCLE
Cest une fonction fondant lemplacement de PRESET de VIT CYCLE dans le
mouvement BALAYAGE.
Il peut mettre VIT CYCLE de 1-60 Sec.
SORITIE
"QUITTER": Ne garde pas linformation choisie et retourne au menu plus haut.
"SAUVER": Garde linformation choisie et retourne au menu plus haut.
"EFFACE" : Supprime linformation choisie et reconstitue le Dfaut et retourne au menu
plus haut.
PRESET
Le total de 128 presets sont disponible incluant le choix demplacement PAN/ TILT et
ZOOM/ FOCUS et fondant les conditions de lcran et le contrle.
Parmi les 128 PRESETS,PRESET 0 : POS ORIGING,PRESET1 : ALARME 1,
PRESET2 :ALARME2,PRESET3 :ALARME3,PRESET4 :ALARME4 : PRESET5
:mis comme MOTION corrspondant Preset spcial.
Pressez
[Enter]
Pressez
[Enter]
** MENU **
CAMERA...
PROG VIDEO...
PRESET...
MODE AUTO...
PROG ALARME...
AUTRE PROG...
(PRESET CARTE)
0 H 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29
30 31 RET
I D: PRESET 0
PRESET NO. 0
PROG POSITION ...
PROG VIDEO OFF...
PRESET ID ON...
BALAYAGE ON
VIT CYCLE 2 S
SORTIE QUITTER
PRESET NO. 0
PROG POSITION ...
PROG VIDEO OFF...
PRESET ID ON...
BALAYAGE ON
VIT CYCLE 2 S
SORTIE QUITTER
PRESET NO. 0 ID
Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
: ! - + * ( ) /
SP SP
POSITION...
RET
PRESET 0....
PRESET NO. 0
PR PAN/TILT
PR ZOOM/FOCUS
3-19
F
3-18
STOP PROG!
PROG STOP
PROG STOP entre dans lcran dinstallation de
STOP PROG en appuyant sur [ENTER]. Ajustez
lemplacement de PAN/ TILT et pressez ENTER pour
retourner au menu plus haut.
DIRECTION
Fondez la direction de mouvement demplacement de DEM STOP(standard
demplacement PAN).
Droit: Gauche:
SANS FIN
Cest la fonction de rotation dun 360 degrs qui sarrte seulement pour le VIT CYCLE dans
les positions de DEM et de STOP.Il peut tre mis ON ou OFF.
VITESSE
Cest une fonction darrangement pour le mouvement de vitesse dinstallation. Il peut
tre mis du STEP1 STEP64.
VIT CYCLE
Cest une fonction pour fonder le temps pour rester dans la position de DEM et STOP.
DEM PROG!
MODE AUTO
Les fonctions AUTO PAN et RONDE sont dans le AUTO MODE.
PAN AUTO
Aprs slection de deux points(PAN /TILT) de DEM et STOP,il boucle continuellement
dans le jeu dinstallation SPEED.
PROG DEM
De PROG DEM entre dans lcran dinstallation de
DEM PROG en appuyant sur [ENTER]
Aprs la slection des emplacements de PAN/ TILT,
pressez[ ENTER] encore une fois pour retourner au
menu plus haut.
Pressez
[Enter]
Pressez
[Enter]
** MENU **
CAMERA...
PROG VIDEO...
PRESET...
MODE AUTO...
PROG ALARME...
AUTER PROG...
(MODE AUTO)
PAN AUTO ...
PROG RONDE 1...
RET
PAN AUTO
PROG DEM ...
PROG STOP ...
DIRECTION GAUCHE
SANS FIN OFF
VITESSE PAS20
VIT CYCLE 2 S
SORTIE QUITTER
3-21
F
3-20
PROG ALARME
Il consiste en 4 ALARME INPUTs et 3 SORT ALARME. Il peut sentir une entre
dALARME de Dtecteurs extrieurs et il excute avec PRESET ou la fonction de
modle et produit le signal dA SORT ALARME.
Il reconnat le signal dentre ALARME comme le signal ALARME quand il contient plus
que 150ms pour peu de temps.Chaque temps de mouvement dALARME est dcid
selon sa correspondance VIT CYCLE de RONDE et RONDE connect.
PR PRIORITE ALARME
Met la priorit de 4 ALARME dentre et correspond
priorit. La priorit du dfaut est ALARME1:1, ALARME2:2,
ALARME3:3, ALARME4:4. Si lALARME est fonctionn en
mme temps et la priorit est la mme,il fonctionnera selon
la priorit du dfaut.Tandis qu ALARME est fonction il ne
peut pas dtecter MOUVE.
PR ENT ALARME
Mettez le TYPE NO(ouverture normale), NF(fermeture
normale),ou OFF selon les particularits du Dtecteur
connect.
Pressez
[Enter]
RONDE
Cest une fonction de replay(rejouer) pour que les fonctions manuelles comme
PAN,TILT,ZOOM et FOCUS sont jou pendant 30 secondes.
PROG RONDE1
RONDE peut tre mis 3. Coisissez 1,2 ou 3 avec la clef droite/ gauche dans le
PROG RONDE et pressez [ENTER] pour entrer dans lcran dinstallation de
RONDE.
De ce moment PROG RONDE 1 est parti pendant 30 secondes, il mmorise les
mouvements MANUAL et aprs 30 secondes il retournera au menu plus haut.Si vous
voulez finir linstallation avant que 30 secondes finissent , pressez [ENTER].
Pressez
[Enter]
Pressez
[Enter]
** MENU **
CAMERA...
PROG VIDEO...
PRESET...
MODE AUTO...
PROG ALARME...
AUTER PROG...
(MODE AUTO)
PAN AUTO ...
PROG RONDE 1...
RET
** MENU **
CAMERA...
PROG VIDEO...
PRESET...
MODE AUTO...
PROG ALARME...
AUTER PROG...
PR ALARME
PR PRIORITE ALARME..
PR ENT ALARME..
PR SORT ALARME..
PR RONDE ALARME..
CONTRLE SORTIE
AUX..
RET
PRIORITE ALARME
ALARME1 1
ALARME2 2
ALARME3 3
ALARME4 4
SORTIE QUITTER
ENT ALARME
ALARME1 NO
ALARME2 NF
ALARME3 NO
ALARME4 NF
SORTIE QUITTER
3-23
F
3-22
SORT ALARME
Chaque entre dALARME correpond un de 3
dALRME OUT. <LALARME 3 est dsign comme
Replay OUT>
RONDE ALARME
Cela met lopration de mouvement de RONDE en
introduisant ALARME.Quand lALARME est introduit la
correspondance sera comme suit : ALARME 1 input
PRESET1,ALARME2input PRESET2,ALARME3 input
PRESET3,ALARME4 input PRESET4 et MOUVE
input PRESET5.
Quand lALARM est fonctionn,il restera lemplacement
PRESET correspondant lAlarm pour VIT CYCLE et
lALARM connct RONDE fonctionnera
continuellement les mouvements RONDE.
CONTRLE SORT
LOFF dans le menu dinstallation ne fait pas fonctionner le RONDE, et il signifie 1
RONDE1,2 RONDE2,3RONDE3, motion continue de DEMI1
RONDE1+RONDE2,motion continue de DEMI2RONDE2+RONDE3et motion
continue de FULLRONDE1+RONDE2+RONDE3 .
Cela met la motion SORT ALARME pour continuer ou
agir seulement quand lALARME travaille.Sil est mis
OFF la motion fonctionne seulement quand l ALARME
fera ressortir(Actif "bas"),et sil est mis ON, lSORT
ALARME fonctionnera toujours indpendamment de
lALARME.
AUTRE PRG
AC(CALIBRATION AUTO)
Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver la fonction CALIBRATION AUTO.
La SCC-C641(P) supporte la fonction Calibration Automatique en vue daugmenter la
prcision de lobjectif et du moteur PAN/TILT.
Vous pouvez slectionner lune des valeurs suivantes :
OFF/6HEURE/12HEURE/18HEURE/24HEURE. Si aucune touche nest appuye pendant un
certain temps dfini par lutilisateur, "A.C." apparat lcran durant linitialisation de
lOBJECTIF et du PAN/TILT.
P.P/T(P/T PROPORTIONEL)
Cette fonction permet de changer la vitesse des mouvements PAN/TILT suivant le
changement de puissance du ZOOM lors dun contrle PAN/TILT manuel. Lorsque vous la
rglez sur ON, la vitesse augmente avec le ZOOM LARGE et diminue avec le ZOOM TELE.
RET ORIGINE
Lorsquaucune touche nest actionne ou quaucun mouvement nest enregistr pendant une
certaine priode, la camera se dplacera vers la position de dpart. La position ORIGINE
peut tre configure dans le menu POS ORIGINE.
CONFIGURATION DU DLAI DE RETOUR LA POSITION DE DPART:
OFF (dsactiv) : Annulation de la fonction RETOUR ORIGINE
(retour la position de dpart)
OFF 1 MIN 2 MIN 3 MIN ~ 60MIN ~12HEURE
RETOURNEMENT
Lorsque vous actionnez la fonction Tilt (inclinaison) 90 laide de la manette, la fonction PAN
(panoramique) de la camera effectue automatiquement une rotation de 180 . La zone oppose
celle de linclinaison (Tilt) deviendra alors visible.
Cela produit un effet dagrandissement de la zone dinclinaison de 180 degrs.
POS ORIGINE
Vous pouvez slectionner la position de dpart partir des positions prrgles et
numrotes de 0 127.
SORT ALARME
ALARME1 1
ALARME2 2
ALARME3 3
ALARME4 2
MOUVE 1
SORTIE QUITTER
RONDE ALARME
ALARME1 DEM1
ALARME2 PLEIN
ALARME3 DEM2
ALARME4 4
MOUVE 2
SORTIE QUITTER
CONTROLE SORTIE AUX
SORTIE1 ON
SORTIE2 OFF
SORTIE3 ON
SORTIE QUITTER
3-25
F
3-24
Spcification du produit
Contenus
- Lentille de Zoom corps simple
- AC 24 10% (60Hz 0.3Hz)
- 18W
- Systme color standard NTSC
- 1/4 inch IT CCD
- 768(H) x 494(V)
- 525 lignes, Entrelacer 2:1
- INT/LIGNE BLOC
- Ligne TV480
- 52dB (CAG OFF)
(0.01 Lux)
- BA/BM/Manu Mode
(3200 K, 5600 K, R/B Cour de Gain)
- un corps; 22X Lentille de Zoom
- longueur focale : 3.6 to 79.2 mm
- Ouverture : F1.6(Large), F3.8( Tl)
- Centre automatique
- Gamme de PAN : 360 Infini(Endless)
- La vitesse de Preset Pan : 240 /sec, maximum
- La vitesse de Pan Manue : 0.8 ~ 90 /sec (64Step)
- Gamme de TILT : 0 ~ 90
- La vitesse de Preset TILT : 150 /sec, maximum
- La vitesse de TILT Manue : 0.8 ~ 45 /sec (64Step)
- Tl/Large(ZOOM), Proche/Loin(FOCUS),
Iris Ouverture/Fermeture Pan/Inclination
- Entre dAlarme : 4 IN(5mA Coule)
- Production dAlarme : 3 OUT (Collecteur ouvert : 2
- -10C ~ +50C (14F~122F)
- ~90%
- Dme : 147 (),
Contour : 159.5() x 176(H)(Adaptateur:23.5(H)mm)
- 2Kg
NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Articles
Type de produit
Entre lectrique
Consommation lectrique
Type de radiodiffusion
Dispositif dimage
Pixel efficace
Mode de balayage
Frquence de ligne de
balayage
Mode de synchronisation
Resolution
Proportion S/N
Illumination dobjet Min.
Temprature colore
Production de signal
OBJECTIF
Fonction de PAN
Fonction de TILT
Tlcommande
Alarme
Temprature dopration
Humidit dopration
Taille
Poids
SCC-641
RAZ CAM
La fonction RAZ CAM efface tous les paramtres dfinis par lutilisateur et restaure les
valeurs par dfaut.
Lorsque vous slectionnez cette fonction, le message RAZ CAMERA? apparat lcran.
Slectionnez ANNULER pour revenir lcran du menu de configuration ou slectionnez
OK pour restaurer les valeurs prdfinies par le fabricant.
G
Soyez prudent lorsque vous lancez la commande RAZ CAM, puisque tous vos paramtres
seront effacs.
3-27
F
3-26
Mises en garde
Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. est le propritaire des droits dauteur
de ce guide dutilisation.
Il est strictement interdit de copier ce guide sous forme lectronique,
mcanique, audio ou autre sans la permission explicite de la part de
Samsung Electronics.
Le prsent guide dutilisation peut faire lobjet de modifications en
fonction des amliorations apportes au produit une date ultrieure.
Spcification du produit
Contenus
- Lentille de Zoom corps simple
- AC 24 10% (50Hz 0.3Hz)
- 18W
- Systme color standard PAL
- 1/4 inch IT CCD
- 752(H) x 582(V)
- 625 lignes, Entrelacer 2:1
- INT/LIGNE BLOC
- Ligne TV480
- 52 dB (CAG OFF)
(0.01 Lux)
- BA/BM/Manu Mode
(3200 K, 5600 K, R/B Cour de Gain)
- un corps; 22X Lentille de Zoom
- longueur focale : 3.6 to 79.2 mm
- Ouverture : F1.6(Large), F3.8( Tl)
- Centre automatique
- Gamme de PAN : 360 Infini(Endless)
- La vitesse de Preset Pan : 240 /sec, maximum
- La vitesse de Pan Manue : 0.8 ~ 90 /sec (64Step)
- Gamme de TILT : 0 ~ 90
- La vitesse de Preset TILT : 150 /sec, maximum
- La vitesse de TILT Manue : 0.8 ~ 45 /sec (64Step)
- Tl/Large(ZOOM), Proche/Loin(FOCUS),
Iris Ouverture/Fermeture Pan/Inclination
- Entre dAlarme : 4 IN(5mA Coule)
- Production dAlarme : 3 OUT (Collecteur ouvert : 2
- -10C ~ +50C (14F~122F)
- ~90%
- Dme : 147 (),
Contour : 159.5() x 176(H)(Adaptateur:23.5(H)mm)
- 2Kg
NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Articles
Type de produit
Entre lectrique
Consommation lectrique
Type de radiodiffusion
Dispositif dimage
Pixel efficace
Mode de balayage
Frquence de ligne de
balayage
Mode de synchronisation
Resolution
Proportion S/N
Illumination dobjet Min.
Temprature colore
Production de signal
OBJECTIF
Fonction de PAN
Fonction de TILT
Tlcommande
Alarme
Temprature dopration
Humidit dopration
Taille
Poids
SCC-641P
Es
SmartDome Camera
SCC-641(P)
Manual del usuario
Es
Medidas de seguridad
El propsito de esta informacin es garantizar el uso apropiado de este
producto con el fin de prevenir cualquier peligro o dao a la propiedad.
Srvase tomar en cuenta todas las medidas de seguridad.
* Estas medidas estn divididas en avisos de "Advertencia" y avisos de
"Precaucin", tal como se distinguen a continuacin:
Advertencia: El ignorar este aviso de advertencia puede ocasionar lesin
grave o la muerte.
Precaucin: El ignorar este aviso de precaucin puede ocasionar lesin o
un dao a la propiedad.
Los avisos de advertencia le
alertan de un riesgo potencial de
muerte o de lesin grave.
Los avisos de precaucin le alertan
de un riesgo potencial de lesin o de
dao a la propiedad.
6. No coloque encima de la cmara objetos conductores
(p.ej., destornilladores, monedas, u objetos metlicos) o envases llenos de
agua. (El hacerlo puede causar daos corporales debido a la posible
ocurrencia de fuego, choque elctrico o la cada de los objetos.)
7. No instale la unidad en sitios hmedos, con mucho polvo o ennegrecidos
por el humo. (El hacerlo puede ocasionar un fuego o un choque elctrico.)
8. Si hay algn olor inusual o humo que sale de la unidad, deje de utilizar el
producto.
En ese caso, desconecte inmediatamente la fuente de alimentacin y
pngase en contacto con el centro de servicios. (El continuar usando la
cmara en tales condiciones puede provocar un incendio o un choque
elctrico.)
9. Si este producto presenta una falla de funcionamiento, comunquese con la
tienda en donde lo adquiri, o con el centro de servicios ms cercano.
Nunca desarme ni modifique este producto de ninguna manera.
(Samsung no es responsable por los problemas causados por
modificaciones no autorizadas o por intentos de reparacin.)
10. Al limpiarlo, no salpique agua directamente sobre las piezas del producto.
(El hacerlo puede ocasionar un fuego o un choque elctrico.)
Limpie la superficie con un pao seco. Nunca use detergentes o
limpiadores qumicos en el producto, ya que esto puede causar
decoloracin de la superficie o causar un dao en el acabado.
Precaucin
1. No deje caer objetos en el producto ni lo golpee. Mantngalo alejado de
lugares sujetos a vibracin excesiva o interferencia magntica.
2. No lo instale en un sitio sometido a altas temperaturas (por encima
de122F), a bajas temperaturas (por debajo de 14F), o a mucha
humedad.(El hacerlo puede ocasionar un fuego o un choque elctrico.)
3. Evite los sitios expuestos a la luz del sol o que estn cerca de fuentes de
calor tales como calentadores o radiadores.
(El no observar esto puede ocasionar un riesgo de fuego.)
4. Si usted quiere cambiar de ubicacin el producto ya instalado, no olvide
apagarlo antes de moverlo o de reinstalarlo.
5. Instale en un sitio con buena ventilacin.
6. Saque el enchufe del tomacorriente cuando haya una tormenta elctrica.
(El no observar esto puede ocasionar un incendio o un dao al producto.)
Advertencia
1. Asegrese de usar exclusivamente el adaptador suministrado.
(El usar un adaptador diferente al suministrado puede ocasionar un
incendio, un choque elctrico o un dao al producto.)
2. Cuando vaya a conectar la fuente de alimentacin y los cables de las
seales, revise antes los terminales de conexin externa. Conecte los
cables de las seales de alarma a los terminales para las alarmas, el
adaptador de CA al receptculo de entrada de CA y el adaptador de CC a
la entrada de CC, asegurndose de tener en cuenta las polaridades.
(Una conexin incorrecta de la fuente de alimentacin puede ocasionar un
incendio, un choque elctrico o un dao al producto.)
3. No conecte varias cmaras a un adaptador.
(El exceder la capacidad puede producir una generacin anormal de calor
o un fuego.)
(Una eventual cada de la cmara puede causar lesiones corporales.)
4. Enchufe firmemente el cable elctrico en el receptculo de corriente.
(Una conexin floja puede producir fuego.)
5. Al instalar la cmara en una pared o un techo, sujtela bien y con firmeza.
(Una eventual cada de la cmara puede causar lesiones corporales.)
1-2
Es
1-1
Nota: Este equipo ha sido probado y cumple los lmites de un dispositivo digital Clase B
segn la parte 15 de las reglas FCC. Estos lmites estn diseados para ofrecer una proteccin
razonable contra la interaccin daina en una instalacin residencial. Este equipo genera, usa y
puede irradiar energa de radiofrecuencia y, si no se instala y utiliza de acuerdo con las
instrucciones, puede causar interferencias dainas a la comunicacin por radio.
Sin embargo, no hay garanta alguna de que las interferencias no ocurrirn en una instalacin
concreta. Si este equipo causa interferencia daina a la recepcin de radio o televisin, puede
determinarse encendiendo y apagando el equipo, y se anima al usuario a tratar de corregir la
interferencia por medio de una o ms de las medidas siguientes:de las medidas siguientes:
- Reoriente o coloque en otro lugar la antena receptora.
- Aumente la separacin entre el equipo y el receptor.
- Conecte el equipo a una toma elctrica en un circuito diferente de aquel al que est
conectado el receptor.
- Pida ayuda a su proveedor o a un tcnico experimentado de radio o TV.
Aprobacin de estndares
Antes de Instalar el equipo
Este es un manual bsico de usuario del SCC-641(P).
Contiene todas las instrucciones bsicas de uso del SCC-641(P)
desde una simple introduccin de las funciones de control hasta
mtodos de instalacin y men de ajustes.
Recomendamos leer este manual de instrucciones antes de un
uso del mismo, tanto por usuarios avanzados como por usuarios
principiantes.
El apartado ms usado del SCC-641(P) ser el men de ajustes.
El men de ajustes est explicado con detalle en el Captulo 3
Men de ajustes.
El manual debe ser ledo de principio a fin, pero para usuarios
que deseen centrarse en un captulo consulte el Sumario
siguiente:
Captulo 1 Caractersticas del SCC-641(P) incluye una breve
introduccin del SCC-641(P), nombres de los componentes y
funciones, y ajustes de los microinterruptores.
Captulo 2 Instalacin del SCC-641(P) explica el
procedimiento de instalacin del SCC-641(P) y proporciona
consejos para la preparacin del lugar de instalacin.
Captulo 3 Men de Ajustes presenta la estructura del men
de ajustes y una detallada explicacin de las funciones de cada
submen.
El apndice de las Especificaciones del producto SCC-641(P)
contiene las especificaciones del producto SCC-641(P) en
categoras detalladas.
1-4
Es
1-3
PROG VDEO 3-9
-IRIS 3-9
-OBTURADOR 3-10
-CAG 3-11
-BAL BLANCO 3-13
-ESPECIAL 3-14
-AUTO FOCO 3-15
-D-ZOOM 3-15
-SALIDA 3-15
PRESET 3-16
AUTO MODE 3-18
-AUTO PAN 3-18
-RONDA 3-20
ALARMA PROG 3-21
ALTRA PROG 3-23
Especificaciones del producto 3-25
INDICE
Antes de Instalar el equipo 1-1
Captulo 1 Caractersticas del SCC-641P 1-5
Introduccin del SCC-641P 1-6
Localizacin de controles - Frontall 1-7
Localizacin de controles - Posterior 1-8
Conexiones del adaptador 1-9
Ajustes Iniciales 1-10
Ajustes de la terminacin del RS-422/RS-485 1-11
Configuracin Conmutadores 1-12
Captulo 2 Instalacin del SCC-641P 2-1
Chequeo del contenido 2-2
Precauciones para la instalacin y uso 2-3
Preparacin del cable 2-5
Conexin del cable 2-6
Instalacin de SCC-641(P) 2-7
Captulo 3 Men de ajustes 3-1
Contenido del men de ajustes 3-2
MEN GENERAL DE CMARA CONTENIDOS 3-5
CMARA 3-5
-CMARA ID 3-5
-SYNC 3-6
-VEL ZOOM 3-6
-DET MOVI 3-7
-SALIDA 3-8
1-6
Es
1-5
Introduccin del SCC-641P
El domo SCC-641P es una cmara de vigilancia con zoom incorporado.
Proporciona altos niveles de seguridad de CCTV para banca o todo tipo de
compaas.
El domo SCC-641P es una cmara de vigilancia de altas prestaciones
usando zoom x22 y zoom digital x10, siendo un zoom total de x220.
El SCC-641P tiene las siguientes funcines: incremento de sensibilidad que
permite visualizar imgenes en ambientes con luz practicamente nula,
Balance de blancos que permite corregir la los colores naturales
dependiendo de la luz ambiente, Compensacin de contraluz que permite
ver objetos con claridad incluso bajo condiciones de luz muy brillantes y
Autoenfoque que permite autoenfocar la imagen de acuerdo al movimento
que lleve el SCC-641P. Es una cmara con mltiples funciones que
contempla adems todas las ms importantes funciones de otras cmaras
de vigilancia.
El SCC-641P dispone de funciones de alarma para situaciones de alerta y
movimiento de la cmara a la direccin deseada, se pueden controlar
remotamente las funciones de ZOOM IN y ZOOM OUT mediante el teclado
SSC-1000, el grabador digital SHR-2016P y el transmisor web SNS-100P.
CAPITULO 1 CARACTERSTICAS DEL SCC-641P
En este captulo se introduce brevemente el SCC-641P y
sus principales funciones, controles y ajuste de
interruptores.
1-8
Es
1-7
Localizacin de controles - Posterior Localizacin de controles
Frontal
Cubierta externa
Cubierta Interna
Lente Zoom
1-10
Es
1-9
Conexiones del adaptador
PLACA de adaptador SCC-641 (P)
Installation dadresse de camera
Dip Switch setting est mme comme lexemple suivant.
EX) CAMERA ADDR : quand il est le nombre 1, mettez comme suit.
Arrangement de protocole de communication.
Utilisez les nombres 5-8 PIN de SW501 pour mettre Protocole de communication.
Configuration du dbit en bauds
Utilisez les BROCHES 3 et 4 du SW501.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
SW500
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
BAUD RATE
4800 BPS
9600 BPS
19200 BPS
38400 BPS
PIN 3
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
PIN 4
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
B : SAMSUNG (SSC-1000) MAXIMUM
PIN5 PIN6 PIN7 PIN8
A OFF OFF OFF OFF
B ON OFF OFF OFF
C OFF ON OFF OFF
D ON ON OFF OFF
E OFF OFF ON OFF
F ON OFF ON OFF
G OFF ON ON OFF
H ON ON ON OFF
I OFF OFF OFF ON
J ON OFF OFF ON
K OFF ON OFF ON
L ON ON OFF ON
M OFF OFF ON ON
N ON OFF ON ON
O OFF ON ON ON
P ON ON ON ON
PIN
Comp
SW501
SW500
(VUE DE DESSOUS)
REPORTEZ-VOUS AU
GUIDE DUTILISATION
1-12
Es
1-11
CONFIGURACIN CONMUTADORES
Direccin de receptor
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
SW500-1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SW500-2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW500-3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-5
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-6
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-7
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-8
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Ajuste de la terminacin RS-422/RS-485
Como muestra la figura cuando se conectan varios SCC-641P a un controlador (por ej.
El SSC-1000) el ltimo domo debe ser terminado en cuanto a impedancia del cable.
<Conexin RS-422A / RS-485 en HALF DUPLEX>
n < 128
Terminacin
SW1-ON
Divisin
Para ello se deben usar los interruptores 1 y 2, en ON significa final de la lnea.
<Conexin RS-422A/RS485 en FULL DUPLEX>
Divisin
Divisin
SW1-ON
SW2-ON
n < 128
PRECAUCION
Si se programan varios domos con la misma direccin puede ocurrir
un fallo de comunicaciones.
1-14
Es
1-13
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
SW500-1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SW500-2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW500-3
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-5
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-6
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-7
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-8
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
SW500-1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SW500-2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW500-3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-4
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-5
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-6
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-7
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-8
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
1-16
Es
1-15
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
SW500-1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SW500-2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW500-3
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-4
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-5
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-7
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-6
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
SW500-1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SW500-2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW500-3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-5
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-6
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-7
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
2-2
Es
2-1
Antes de la instalacin
Chequeo del contenido de la caja
Por favor compruebe que todos los componentes indicados ms abajo han llegado en
la caja del equipo:
SCC-641(P) Anclaje en U
Adaptador/conector de cmara
Cubierta
CAPITULO 2 INSTALACION DEL SCC-641P
En este captulo revisaremos los puntos principales antes de la
instalacin, necesidades para la misma y precauciones durante la
instalacin de SCC-641(P). Despus le mostraremos la instalacin en s
de SCC-641(P) y las conexiones de cable.
Instrucciones, embellecedor y conectores
2-4
Es
2-3
Nunca encare el SCC-641P al sol
Est el SCC-641P en uso o no, nunca encare el SCC-641P al sol. Tenga
cuidado de no exponer el SCC-641P con luces muy fuertes cercanas u otros
brillos y luces reflectantes de objetos.
El SCC-641P debe funcionar en ambientes estables. Estas son las
caractersticas de un ambiente estable.
Temperatura : -10C ~ +50C(14F~ 122F)
Nivel de humedad : 90% o menos
Debe usar una alimentacin adecuada a las especificaciones del
producto:
Potencia consumida : 18W
Alimentacin : 24AC, 1.5A
Precauciones para la instalacin y uso
No intente desmontar el SCC-641P
Existe riesgo de descarga elctrica si manipula los tornillos de la tapa
posterior del domo. Se recomienda feacientemente evitar la manipulacin del
interior de la unidad SCC-641P. Si precisa una inspeccin interna consulte
con su proveedor.
Manipule el SCC-641P con cuidado
Aunque el SCC-641P es un producto duradero, manejarlo con cuidado
alargar su vida operativa y se preveern posibles fallos. Evite sacudir o
golpear directamente la cmara para evitar daos y manjelo y almacnelo
con cuidado.
No exponga el SCC-641P a la lluvia o polvo o en ambientes hmedos
Si el SCC-641P toma contacto con el agua, desconecte la alimentacin
inmediatamente y contacte son su proveedor. El polvo puede daar el
SCC-641P y se incrementa el peligro de descarga elctrica.
No use detergentes fuertes ni abrasivos para limpiar el cuerpo del
SCC-641P
Si se ensucia el SCC-641P use trapos secos para limpiar la unidad. En caso
de que la suciedad sea dificil de quitar use un jabn suave y limpie con
cuidado.
2-6
Es
2-5
Conexin del cableado
1. Primero conecte un coaxial del Vdeo Out del SCC-641P al Vdeo In de un monitor.
2. Conecte el cable de alimentacin del alimentador. Use un destornillador para
conectar la alimentacin en las bornas IN de 24VAC del SCC-641P.
3. Conecte el mando controlador con el domo. Use el cable proporcionado con el
mando SSC-1000. Conecte el RX OUT del mando controlador (SSC-1000) al Txd
del SCC-641P
4. Ajuste el interruptor bajo el Adaptador elctrico al voltaje adecuado. Despus,
conecte el enchufe del Adaptador elctrico al conector.
5. Conecte el terminal del Control remoto de SCC-641(P) y el mando Controlador
externo.
Para instalar el SCC-641P debe tener preparados los siguientes cables.
Cable de alimentacin
Debe proveerse de un alimentador de 24VAC y 1.5A
Cable coaxial
El cable de vdeo para el SCC-641P debe ser un coaxial RG59 (hasta 300m) o RG11
(hasta 600m) con conectores BNC en ambos extremos para conectar entre el Vdeo Out
de la cmara y el Vdeo In del monitor.
Preparacin del cable
2-8
Es
2-7
1. Figura 1. Instalacin del equipo empotrado
(Consulte la gua de Instalacin acerca de la longitud de la estructura)
*
Empotrar en el cuerpo de la estructura.
3. (Figura 2) Instale el soporte en U con 4 tornillos.
Instalacin del SCC-641P
[figura 2]
[figura 1]
2. Haga un agujero en el techo donde vaya a ser instalada la cmara.
(El agujero debe ser aproximadamente de 180 mm de dimetro).
5. (Figura 5) Ensamble el Adaptador de la cmara al anclaje en U usando 4 tornillos
(PH M4X8) para unirlos.
[figura 5]
4. (Figura 3 y 4) Conecte todos los cables indicados en la pgina 14.
[figura 4]
[figura 3]
Longitud del agujero del techo
Anclaje en U
Adaptador de cmara
3-1
Es
CAPITULO 3 MENU DE AJUSTES
En este captulo se recorrer el men de ajustes del SCC-641P.
Primero se ver la estructura del men de ajustes y luego se
explicarn cada uno de los mens.
2-9
6. (Figura 6) Inserte los tres esprragos del cuerpo del domo en el resultante de la figura 5
(adaptador de cmara ms anclaje en U) y girelo unos 15. (Chequee el sonido que se
produce al encajar una pieza con la otra y que est en posicin correcta)
*
Use los tornillos (BH M3XL8) para fijar el cuerpo del domo al adaptador de la cmara de
forma la unidad ensamblada no se mueva.
[figura 6]
7. (Figura 7) Coloque el embellecedor del domo en el domo.
[figura 7]
Adaptador+anclaje U
Cuerpo del domo
Embellecedor
3-3
Es
3-2
AUTO MODO AUTO PAN ...
PROG RONDA 1/2/3
ALARMA PROG PROG PRIORIDAD ALARMA ALARMA1 1~4
ALARMA2 1~4
ALARMA3 1~4
ALARMA4 1~4
SALIDA SALIR/GUARDAR
PROG ENT ALARMA ALARMA1 OFF/N.ABIERTO/N.CERRADO
ALARMA2 OFF/N.ABIERTO/N.CERRADO
PROG SAL ALARMA ALARMA1 1~3
ALARMA2 1~3
ALARMA3 1~3
ALARMA4 1~3
MOVI 1~3
PROG RONDA ALARMA ALARMA1 OFF/1~3/MEDIO1/MEDIO2/LLENO
ALARMA2 OFF/1~3/MEDIO1/MEDIO2/LLENO
MOVI OFF/1~3/MEDIO1/MEDIO2/LLENO
CONTROL SALIDA AUX SALIDA1 OFF
SALIDA2 OFF
SALIDA3 OFF
ALTRA PROG AC OFF/6HORA/12HORA/18HORA/24HORA
P.P/T ON/OFF
VUELTA ORIG OFF/1~60MIN/2~12HORA
POS DE ORIG 0~127
REVOCACIN OFF/ON
RESET CM...
IDIOMA ESPANOL
CMARA CMARA ID OFF/ON...
SYNC INT/L_EA...
VEL ZOOM 1/2/3/4
DET MOVI OFF/ON...
SALIDA SALIR/GUARDAR/PRESET
OBTURADOR OFF/1/100~1/10K/AUTO/FIJO
CAG OFF/ON
BAL BLANCO BA/BM/MANU...
ESPECIAL OFF/ON... POSI/NEGA +/-
PIP OFF/ON...
ESPEJO OFF/ON
DTL H (0)----I--
DTL V (0)---I---
VUE
AUTO FOCO AF/MF/UNOAF
D-ZOOM AUS/X2~X10
SALIDA SALIR/GUARDAR/PRESET
PRESET PROG POSICIN ...
PRESET ID ON.../OFF
BARRIDO ON/OFF
CICLO TIEMPO 1~60S
SALIDA S ALIR/GUARDAR/BORRAR
Estructura del men de ajustes
3-5
Es
3-4
MEN GENERAL DE CMARA Contenidos
El Men de cmara consiste en el Men de CONFIGURACIN DE CMARA (CAMERA
SET) y el de CONFIGURACIN DE VDEO (VIDEO SET).
CMARA ID
El men CMARA ID asigna una identificacin al SCC-641P que se visualizar en el
monitor conectado. Seleccionar CMARA ID a ON y presionar [ENTER]. Se ver la
sub-pantalla para escribir el nombre del SCC-641P. La Cmara ID puede tener ms de
12 caracteres alfanumricos, adems de algunos caracteres especiales. El nombre
asignado a la cmara se puede colocar en diferentes puntos de la pantalla usando el
submen POSICIN.
Preslone
[Entre]
Significa que hay submens.
El diagrama anterior ilustra la estructura del men de ajustes. En la siguiente
seccin se describen con detalle cada uno de los mens y submens.
(PROG CMARA)
CMARA ID OFF
SYNC INT
VEL ZOOM 3
DET MOVI OFF
SALIDA SALIR
(PROG VIDEO)
IRIS ALC...
OBTURADOR OFF
CAG ON
BAL BLANCO BA
ESPECIAL OFF
AUTO FOCO UNOAF
D-ZOOM OFF
SALIDA SALIR
(PROG CMARA)
CMARA ID ON...
SYNC INT
VEL ZOOM 3
DET MOVI OFF
SALIDA SALIR
(CMARA ID)
Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
: ! - + ( ) /
SP SP
POSICIN...
VUE
SCC-641P.....
3-7
Es
3-6
DET MOVI
En DET MOVI, se puede ajustar la funcin de Deteccin de Movimiento, Sensibilidad de
Deteccin de Movimiento y el rea de Deteccin . Si se ajusta la funcin de deteccin de
Movimiento, se detectar el movimiento de un intruso. Cuando el movimiento es detectado, se
activa una seal de alarma.
Seleccionar ON y presionar [ENTER] en el SSC-1000, se visualizar el submen
DET MOVI. La opcin PRESET aplica los valores de fbrica de la funcin de Deteccin de
Movimiento. Con la opcin UTIL, el usuario puede elegir el tamao y la posicin del rea de
deteccin. En la opcin UTIL pulse ENTER, cuando el rea no est parpadeando, se puede
usar las botones [izquierda, derecha, arriba, abajo] para mover y ajustar la. Si se presiona
[ENTER] cuando la rea no esta parpadeando, empezar a parpadear y se podr usar los
botones [izquierda, derecha, arriba, abajo] para ajustar el tamao y la posicin del rea. Pulsar
de nuevo ENTER para salir del men de ajuste de ZONA. Use el menu SENSIBILIDAD para
ajustar la sensibilidad de la Deteccin de Movimiento. Cuanto ms alto sea el valor ajustado
ms alta ser la sensibilidad de la Deteccin. ALTO, MEDIO, BAJO.
Use las teclas

[Izquierda, derecha,
Arriba, Abajo]
Preslone
[Entre]
La funcin de Deteccin de Movimiento no funciona para valores bajos de OBTURADOR,
Preset, BARRIDO, RONDA Mode o Joystick.
SYNC
En el men SYNC, se selecciona el tipo de sincronizacin
vertical. La opcin Int realiza la sincronizacin por reloj
interno, la opcin LNEA ajusta la sincronizacin vertical a
la frecuencia de la alimentacin exterior.
Seleccionar LNEA y presionar [ENTER]. Se ver el submen LNEA BLOC donde se
podr ajustar la fase del LNEA BLOC.
Se puede utilizar el men PHASE del submen LNEA BLOC para asignar tanto ms
FASE como se desee.
VEL ZOOM
En el submen VEL ZOOM se puede seleccionar la
velocidad del Zoom Botn (Tele/Wide).
En el men VEL ZOOM para seleccionar la velocidad.
1: Magnificar x22 veces necesita unos 17 segundos,
Velocidad muy lenta.
Velocidad lenta.
Velocidad alta lenta.
Velocidad muy alta.
Preslone
[Entre]
(PROG CMARA)
CMARA ID ON...
SYNC INT
VEL ZOOM 3
DET MOVI OFF
SALIDA SALIR
(PROG CMARA)
CMARA ID ON...
SYNC LNEA...
VEL ZOOM 3
DET MOVI OFF
SALIDA SALIR
(LNEA BLOC)
FASE (000) ----I ----
VUE
(PROG CMARA)
CMARA ID ON...
SYNC INT
VEL ZOOM 3
DET MOVI OFF
SALIDA SALIR
(PROG CMARA)
CMARA ID ON...
SYNC INT
VEL ZOOM 3
DET MOVI OFF
SALIDA SALIR
(DET MOVI )
ZONA PRESET...
SENSIBILIDAO MEDIO
VUE
TAMAO
POSICIN
TAMAO
POSICIN
3-9
Es
3-8
PROG VDEO MENU
IRIS
El nivel de salida de vdeo en el monitor puede ser controlada por el IRIS dependiendo
del nivel de entrada de luz. El nivel de salida de vdeo puede ser ajustada
automaticamente en la opcin ALC (Auto Compensacin de luz). La apertura y cierre de
la lente Iris pueden ser realizadas manualmente en el men MANU.
BLC (Submen del men ALC/MANU)
Con cmaras convencionales, una fuerte iluminacin de fondo interfiere con la claridad
de los objetos, hacindolos aparecer oscuros. En SCC-641(P), si se fija BLC
(compensacin de luz de fondo), submen del men ALC/MANU, se resolver el
problema de la luz de fondo y se producir una pantalla clara.
ALC
Seleccionar ALC en el men IRIS y presionar [ENTER] para entrar en el submen de
ajuste nivel de salida de vdeo y BLC. El nivel de salida de vdeo puede ser ajustado en
campo NIVEL usando las teclas [izquierda, derecha].
Ajuste de la compensacin de contraluz:
Poner el men BLC a ON para activar la funcin de compensacin de contraluz.
El rea se ajusta en el men ZONA, la opcin PRESET ajusta la programacin a los
valores iniciales de fbrica, la opcin UTIL permite ajustar manualmente el rea donde
se aplicar la compensacin de contraluz. Pulsar [ENTER] en la opcin UTIL, con el
[ENTER] seleccionamos DIMENSIN o POSITIN, cuando el rea est parpadeando use
las flechas arriba, abajo, izquierda, derecha para ajustar el tamao del rea y su
posicin en la pantalla. Pulse [ENTER] para salir de la programacin de compensacin
de contraluz, pulse [ENTER] una vez ms para salir del men de AZONA.
Preslone
[Entre]
SALIDA
Se usa para salir del men PROG CMARA del SCC-641P y volver al men MAIN
MENU.
-SALIR: Ignora el cambio de informacin y restaura la informacin grabada.
-GUARDAR: Guarda la informacin de las condiciones de ajuste del men.
-PRESET: Ignora la informacin cambiada y restaura la programacin inicial por defecto
del men.
(PROG CMARA)
CMARA ID OFF
SYNC INT
VEL ZOOM 3
DET MOVI OFF
SALIDA SALIR
(PROG VIDEO)
IRIS ALC...
OBTURADOR OFF
CAG ON
BAL BLANCO BA
ESPECIAL OFF
AUTO FOCO UNOAF
D-ZOOM OFF
SALIDA SALIR
(ALC)
ZONA PRESET...
BLC OFF
NIVEL (0)----I ----
VUE
3-11
Es
3-10
Si el objeto estuviera en movimiento se vera borroso.
Si pulsa las teclas izquierda/derecha continuamente, la velocidad aparecer en el orden
siguiente.
OFF 1/100(1/120) 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000 1/10K
OFF AUTOX2 AUTOX4 AUTOX6 AUTOX8 AUTOX12
AUTOX96 AUTOX128 OFFFIX X2 FIX X4 FIX X6
FIX X8 FIX X12 FIX X16 FIX X24FIX X32 FIX X48
FIX X64 FIX X96 FIX X128
CAG
En el men de CAG (control de ganancia automtica), se puede fijar el aumento
automticamente cuando el brillo de la pantalla se filma en menos que el estndar en
condiciones de la baja luz. Para controlar automticamente el AUMENTO, fije el men de
CAG a ON o a OFF para un control manual. Si el men del OBTURADOR se fija a AUTO
obturador de la baja velocidad, el valor del men de CAG no puede ser cambiado.
MANU
Si el men IRIS se ajusta a MANU, aparece el submen de ajuste manual para abrir y
cerrar el iris. Usar las teclas [izquierda, derecha] en NIVEL para ajustar manualmente
el IRIS.
OBTURADOR
En el men OBTURADOR, se ajustan:
-el obturador elctrico de alta velocidad que 7 velocidades diferentes desde 1/100 a
1/10.000 de un segundo
-el obturador de baja velocidad AUTO, incrementa la sensibilidad de forma automtica
-el obturador de baja velocidad FIJO, incrementa la sensibilidad forma fija.
El incremento de sensibilidad AUTO y FIJO soportan 12 velocidades diferentes desde 2x a
128x magnificaciones. El obturador de baja velocidad es la funcin que ajusta la velocidad
del obturador para ver claramente los objetos captados con poca luz. Para bajar
automticamente la velocidad del obturador ajuste AUTO baja velocidad del obturador. Si el
usuario quiere seleccionar la velocidad del obturador, se ajusta la opcin FIJO. Los nmeros
despus de AUTO y FIJO son los nmeros de los valores seleccionables. Cuanto ms
grande es el valor, ms lenta ser la velocidad del obturador, as que en una imagen fija la
pantalla se ver ms clara.
Preslone
[Entre]
Use las teclas

[Izquierda, derecha,
Arriba, Abajo]
TAMAO
POSICIN
(PROG VIDEO)
IRIS MANU...
OBTURADOR OFF
CAG ON
BAL BLANCO BA
ESPECIAL OFF
AUTO FOCO UNOAF
D-ZOOM OFF
SALIDA SALIR
(MANUAL)
NIVEL (00)----I ----
VUE
(PROG VIDEO)
IRIS MANU...
OBTURADOR OFF
CAG ON
BAL BLANCO BA
ESPECIAL OFF
AUTO FOCO UNOAF
D-ZOOM OFF
SALIDA SALIR
(PROG VIDEO)
IRIS MANU...
OBTURADOR OFF
CAG ON
BAL BLANCO BA
ESPECIAL OFF
AUTO FOCO UNOAF
D-ZOOM OFF
SALIDA SALIR
TAMAO
POSICIN
3-13
Es
3-12
BAL BLANCO
El men BAL BLANCO asegura que el blanco est calibrado normalmente bajo
cualquier condicin de temperatura del color. Cuando el men BAL BLANCO se fija al
modo de BA, el equilibrio blanco se especifica automticamente segn la temperatura
del color del ambiente.
En el caso de fijar el men BAL BLANCO al modo de BM, presionando [ ENTER ]
colocando un folio blanco delante de la cmara, se fijar automticamente el
equilibrio de blancos de acuerdo con la temperatura del color esta vez solamente .
Si el men BAL BLANCO se fija al modo MANUAL, el usuario puede fijar el equilibrio
blanco que considera la iluminacin actual.
- 3200 K : Fije la temperatura del color a 3200 K
- 5600 K : Fije la temperatura del color a 5600 K
- Usuario: Fije el valor apropiado en el grfico de ROJO y de azules AJUL.
MANU: Seleccione el item de MANU y presione [ ENTER ], aparece el submen donde
usted puede seleccionar el equilibrio blanco manual.
Utilice las teclas izquierda / derecha para seleccionar 3200 K, 5600 K o el modo del
UTIL en el men de PRESET.
Preslone
[Entre]
BAL BLANCO
La luz se mide en temperaturas del color y se expresan generalmente en unidades de
Kelvin (k).
Las temperaturas generales del color de la luz se muestran abajo.
Cielo azul
Lluvioso
Nublado
Parcialmente nublado
asoleado
Fluorescente lmpara
Lmpara del tungsteno
Luz de candela
Lmpara del halgeno
1000K
2000K
3000K
4000K
5000K
6000K
7000K
8000K
9000K
10000K
(PROG VIDEO)
IRIS ALC...
OBTURADOR OFF
CAG ON
BAL BLANCO BA
ESPECIAL OFF
AUTO FOCO UNOAF
D-ZOOM OFF
SALIDA SALIR
(ABB/MANUAL)
PRESET OFF(UTIL)..
ROJO (00) ----I ----
AJUL (00) ----I ----
VUE
3-15
Es
3-14
AUTO FOCO
En el men de auto focus el mtodo de foco se puede fijar en AF,MF, u UNOAF.
- AF : Es el modo automtico de autoenfoque, usted puede vigilar la pantalla continuamente
y se enfocar automticamente. Mientras que mueve las teclas del zoom, se enfocar
automticamente sin ser necesario usar los botones de FOCUS del teclado.
- MF : Es el modo Maual del enfoque, el usuario ajusta el foco manualmente.
- UNOAF : En modo de UNOAF, el SCC-641(P) enfoca automticamente solamente
mientras que est moviendo/parando. Cuando la SCC-641(P) no se est
moviendo, es igual que el modo del MF y cuando est moviendo/parando, es
igual que modo de AF. Utilice las teclas izquierda /derecha para seleccionar AF,
MF, UNOAF en el men de AUTO FOCUS.
D-ZOOM
En el men de D-ZOOM usted puede elegir la ampliacin del zoom Digital. Usted puede
seleccionar una ampliacin desde OFF(sin zoom digital), X2, X4, X6, X8 y X10 veces.
Cuando se selecciona el zoom digital x10, y el zoom Optico est en x22 la cmara
realiza un zoom total de x220.
Usar las flechas izquierda/derecha del mando SSC-1000 para seleccionar el valor del
zoom en el men D-ZOOM.
SALIDA
Es igual que la funcin SALIDA del men de la CMARA SET.
ESPECIAL
En el men especial., pueden ser ajustados: POSI/NEGA, PIP, funcin espejo y nivel
vertical y horizontal del detalle .
- POSI-NEGA : La seal de salida de vdeo es normal/inverso.
- PIP (Imagen en Imagen) : Cuando se activa el zoom Digital, ser mostrada la
pantalla reducida a 1/16.
-Espejo : Invierte la seal de salida de vdeo de izquierda a derecha.
-DTL H : Ajusta el nivel del detalle horizontal.
-DTL V : Ajusta el nivel del detalle vertical.
Seleccione ON y presione [ ENTER ], aparecer el submen ESPECIAL para elegir
las funciones especiales.
Para elegir las funciones utilizar las flechas izquierda/derecha para seleccionar una
opcin. En el men de PIP, seleccione ON y presione [ ENTER ]. Utilice las flechas
[ izquierda, derecha, arriba, abajo] para fijar la localizacin de PIP.
PIP Screen
Preslone
[Entre]
Preslone
[Entre]
PIP no funciona en el MODO del OBTURADOR de baja velocidad (funcin
incremento de sensibilidad AUTO y FIJO)
La funcin espejo no funciona en las ventanas de PIP.
(ESPECIAL)
POSI/NEGA +/-
PIP OFF
ESPEJO OFF
DTL H ( 0)----I ----
DTL V ( 0)--- I -----
VUE
(PROG VIDEO)
IRIS ALC...
OBTURADOR OFF
CAG ON
BAL BLANCO BA
ESPECIAL ON...
AUTO FOCO UNOAF
D-ZOOM OFF
SALIDA SALIR
(ESPECIAL)
POSI/NEGA +/-
PIP ON...
ESPEJO OFF
DTL H ( 0)----I ----
DTL V ( 0)--- I -----
VUE
(PROG VIDEO)
IRIS ALC...
OBTURADOR OFF
CAG ON
BAL BLANCO BA
ESPECIAL ON...
AUTO FOCO UNOAF
D-ZOOM OFF
SALIDA SALIR
(PROG VIDEO)
IRIS ALC...
OBTURADOR OFF
CAG ON
BAL BLANCO BA
ESPECIAL ON...
AUTO FOCO UNOAF
D-ZOOM OFF
SALIDA SALIR
(PROG VIDEO)
IRIS ALC...
OBTURADOR OFF
CAG ON
BAL BLANCO BA
ESPECIAL ON...
AUTO FOCO UNOAF
D-ZOOM X10
SALIDA SALIR
3-17
Es
3-16
PROG POSICIN
Desde PROG POSICIN... presione [ ENTER ] para entrar
en el submen PAN/TILT y FOCUS/ZOOM para fijar la
localizacin de PAN/TILT y la condicin de FOCUS/ZOOM,
presione [ ENTER ] para volver al men anterior.
PROG VDEO
Esta es la funcin de configuracin de pantalla para cada PRESET.
Consulte la explicacin en "Men PROG VIDEO".
PRESET ID
Esta es la identificacin para cada PRESET. Puede ser
fijada hasta 12 caracteres usando las flechas izquierda,
derecha, arriba, abajo. La localizacin de la identificacin se
puede fijar en el submen de la POSICIN... .
BARRIDO
Esta funcin permite la programacin de la secuencia
de presets. (desde el n de preset ms bajo al ms alto
incluidos en la secuencia ininterrumpidamente)
Cuando se ajusta a ON el preset se incluye en la
secuencia, a OFF el preset no se incluye en la secuencia.
CICLO TIEMPO
Esta es la funcin que fija el tiempo de permanencia del preset dentro de la secuencia
de presets Se puede fijar Tiempo de 1 ~ 60 Sec.
SALIDA
Se usa para salir del men CAMERA SET del SCC-641P y volver al men MAIN MENU.
SALIR: para salir de programacin sin guardar los datos modificados.
GUARDAR: para salir de programacin salvando los datos modificados.
PRESET: restaura los valores iniciales programados de fbrica.
PRESET (Preseleccin)
Un total de 128 preset est disponible, en el preset se puede programar: la posicin
PAN/TILT y de Zoom/Foco, y todas las funciones del vdeo asociado. Valores de
0 ~127.
Entre las 128 presets est signados los siguientes:
PRESET 0: Posicin Inicial, PRESET 1: ALARMA1, PRESET 2: ALARMA2,
PRESET 3: ALARMA3 , PRESET 4: ALARMA4, PRESET 5: deteccin de movimiento.
Preslone
[Entre]
Preslone
[Entre]
* * MENU * *
CMARA...
PROG VIDEO ...
PRESET...
AUTO MODO...
ALARMA PROG...
ALTAR PROG...
(PRESET MAPA)
0 H 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29
30 31 VUE
ID:PRESET 0
PRESET NO.0
PROG POSICIN ...
PROG VIDEO OFF
PRESET ID ON...
BARRIDO ON
CICLO TIEMPO 2 S
SALIDA SALIR
PRESET NO.0 ID
Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
: ! - + * ( ) /
SP SP
POSICIN...
VUE
PRESET 0....
PRESET NO.0
PROG POSICIN ...
PROG VIDEO OFF
PRESET ID ON...
BARRIDO ON
CICLO TIEMPO 2 S
SALIDA SALIR
PRESET NO.0
PROG PAN/TILT
PROG ZUMBIDO/FOCO
3-19
Es
3-18
TERMINARI!
PROG STOP
Desde AUTO PAN entre en PROG STOP...
presionando [ ENTER ], aparecer una pantalla con el
mensaje SET END parpadeando seleccione el fin del
AUTOPAN con el joystick. Presione [ ENTER ] otra
vez para volver al men anterior.vez para volver al
men anterior.
DIRECCION
Programar la direccin del movimiento Autopan, a derechas (RIGTH) o a izquierdas
(LEFT).
"a la derecha ": "a la lzquierda " :
SIN FIN
Esta es una funcin de rotacin 360-grado que se para solamente si se programa un
tiempo en la opcin CICLO TIEMPO. En On est habilitado en OFF deshabilitado.
VELOCIDAD
Esto es una funcin que fija la velocidad para el movimiento de AUTOPAN. Puede ser
fijada de STEP1 a STEP64.
CICLO TIEMPO
Esto es una funcin para programar el tiempo de permanencia en las posiciones inicial
(START) y final (END) del movimiento de AUTOPAN.
EMPEZAR!
MODO AUTO
Incluye as funciones de AUTO PAN y RONDA.
AUTO PAN
Despus de programar el comienzo y fin de los dos parmetros (PAN/TILT) , rota
continuamente entre estas dos posiciones a la velocidad (SPEED) configurada.
EMPERZAR PROG
Desde AUTO PAN entre en EMPEZAR PROG...
presionando [ ENTER ], aparecer una pantalla con el
mensaje STAR SET parpadeando seleccione el
comienzo del AUTOPAN con el joystick. Presione
[ ENTER ] otra vez para volver al men anterior.
Preslone
[Entre]
Preslone
[Entre]
* * MENU * *
CMARA...
PROG VIDEO...
PRESET...
AUTO MODO...
ALARMA PROG...
ALTAR PROG...
(AUTO MODO)
AUTO PAN ...
PROG RONDA 1...
VUE
AUTO PAN
EMPEZAR PROG ...
PROG STOP ...
DIRECCION IZQUIERDA
SIN FIN OFF
VELOCIDAD PASO5
CICLO TIEMPO 2 S
AUSGANG VERL
3-21
Es
3-20
RONDA
Esto es una funcin para programar un recorrido manual elegido por el usuario. Se
pueden programar parmetros de PAN/TILT, ZOOM y FOCO. El recorrido puede ser
de hasta 30 sg.
PROG RONDA1
Se pueden fijar 3 RONDA o recorridos.
Elegir 1,2 o 3 con las flechas izquierda /derecha. y presiona [ ENTER] para entrar en el
men de configuracin del recorrido.
Desde que aparece el mensaje PROG RONDA tiene 30 segundos para programar el
recorrido manual que se memoriza automaticamente. Despus de los 30 segundos la
pantalla vuelve al men anterior. Si quiere salir de la programacin del recorrido antes
de los 30 sg. pulse Enter.
Preslone
[Entre]
Preslone
[Entre]
* * MENU V1.0 * *
CMARA...
PROG VIDEO...
PRESET...
AUTO MODO...
ALARMA PROG...
ALTAR PROG...
(AUTO MODO)
AUTO PAN ...
PROG RONDA 1...
VUE
ALARMA PROG
Consiste en 4 entradas de ALARMAS y 3 salidas de ALARMAS.
Puede detectar una entrada de informacin de ALARMA desde un detector exterior y puede
activar un PRESET, un recorrido (RONDA) o seales de salida de ALARMA. Reconoce una
seal de entrada de ALARMA cuando esta est presente ms de 150 segundos, el tiempo de
duracin de la alarma depende de lo programado en CICLO TEMPO, o de la sociacin del
PRESET o RONDA asociados.
PROG PRIORIDAD ALARMA
Este ajuste establece la prioridad de las 4 entradas de alarma,
de tal manera que ALARMA funciona de acuerdo con la
prioridad.
La prioridad predeterminada es ALARMA1: 1, ALARMA2: 2,
ALARMA3: 3, ALARMA4: 4.
Si la alarma est trabajando al el mismo tiempo y la prioridad es
igual, funcionar segn la prioridad del valor por defecto.
Cuando la ALARMA est trabajando, no funciona la deteccin
de movimiento.
PROG ENT ALARMA
Este ajuste establece el tipo de alarma en N.ABIERTO
(Normalmente abierto), a N.CERRADO (para Normalmente
cerrado), o OFF dependiendo de las caractersticas del detector
conectado.
Preslone
[Entrar]
* * MENU V1.0 * *
CMARA...
PROG VIDEO...
PRESET...
AUTO MODO...
ALARMA PROG...
ALTAR PROG...
(PROG ALARMA)
PROG PRIORIDAD ALARMA...
PROG ENT ALARMA...
PROG SAL ALARMA...
PROG RONDA ALARMA...
CONTROL SALIDA AUX...
VUE
PRIORIDAD ALARMA
ALARMA1 1
ALARMA2 2
ALARMA3 3
ALARMA4 4
SALIDA SALIR
ENT ALARMA
ALARMA1 N.ABIERTO
ALARMA2 N.CERRADO
ALARMA3 N.ABIERTO
ALARMA4 N.CERRADO
SALIDA SALIR
3-23
Es
3-22
PROG SAL ALARMA
Asigna las entradas de alarma a las 3 salidas de
ALARMA.
PROG RONDA ALARMA
Fija la operacin de los movimientos del recorrido (RONDA)
asignados a las entradas de ALARMA y a la Deteccin de
movimiento (MOVI).
La correspondencia de asignaciones es la siguiente: Entrada
de Alarma 1 activa el Preset 1. Entrada de Alarma 2 activa el
Preset 2. Entrada de Alarma 3 activa el Preset 3. Entrada de
Alarma 4 activa el Preset 4. Entrada de Alarma 4 activa la
deteccin de movimiento. Cuando se activa una alarma, la
imagen empezar en la posicin de PRESET correspondiente
por el tiempo programado en CICLO TEMPO, y la ALARMA
conectada al RONDA activar el recorrido (RONDA).
Si se establece como OFF en el Men de configuracin, no funciona el patrn (RONDA), y los otros,
significan 1 RONDA1, 2 RONDA 2, 3 RONDA 3, MIDIO1 movimiento continuo de RONDA
1 + RONDA 2, MIDIO 2 movimiento continuo de RONDA 2 + RONDA 3 y LLENO movimiento
continuo de RONDA 1 + RONDA2 + RONDA3.
CONTROL SALIDA AUX
Esto establece el movimiento de salida de alarma (SAL
ALARMA) para que contine o acte slo cuando la
alarma est funcionando.
Si se establece como OFF, el movimiento de salida de
alarma (SAL ALARMA) funcionar slo cuando la alarma
est funcionando.
(Activa BAJO), pero si se establece como ON, la salida
de alarma (SAL ALARMA) siempre funcionar,
independientemente de la alarma.
ALTRA PROG
AC(Auto Calibracin)
Esta funcin se enciende o apaga Auto Calibracin. SCC-C641(P) tiene la funcin de
Auto Calibracin para mejorar la precisin del motor de LENTE y de PAN/TILT.
Usted puede fijar a OFF/6HORA/12HORA/18HORA/24HORA.
Sin la entrada de tecla del usuario por el tiempo sealado por el usuario, A.C. aparecer
en la pantalla mientras que inicializa LENS y PAN/TILT.
P.P/T(PROPORTIONAL P/T)
Esta funcion controla la velocidad de PAN/TILT de forma proporcional de la ampliacion
de ZOOM durante la operacion manual de PAN/TILT. Si usted fija PROPORCIONAL
P/T a ON, la velocidad de PAN/TILT aumentara en el modo ZOOM WIDE y disminuira
en el modo ZOON TELE en la misma operacion manual.
VUELTA ORIG
Cuando pasa un cierto tiempo sin realizar ninguna orden de movimiento desde el
teclado SSC-1000, la cmara se mueve a la localizacin del punto inicial
automticamente. La ubicacin inicial (ORIGEN) se puede asignar en el men de
posicin inicial (POS DEORIG).
Los tiempos seleccionables de espera hasta el retorno alpunto inicial son:
OFF: Cancelacin de la funcion VUELTA ORIG.
OFF 1 MIN 2 MIN 3 MIN ~ 60MIN ~12HORA
REVOCACIN
Cuando se opera la inclinacin al lmite 90 usando el joystick, la cmara realiza un giro
automticamente 180 mostrando trs el giro el rea opuesta de la inclinacin. Da el
efectode ampliar el rea de funcionamiento de la inclinacin 180.
POS DE ORIG
Puede seleccionar la posicin inicial (POS DE ORIG) entre una de las posiciones
programadas numeradas del 0 al 127.
SALIDA ALARMA
ALARMA1 1
ALARMA2 2
ALARMA3 3
ALARMA4 2
MOVI 1
SALIDA SALIR
RONDA ALARMA
ALARMA1 OFF
ALARMA2 OFF
ALARMA3 1
ALARMA4 2
MOVI 3
SALIDA SALIR
CONTROL SALIDA AUX
SALIDA1 OFF
SALIDA2 OFF
SALIDA3 ON
SALIDA SALIR
3-25
Es
3-24
Especificaciones de producto
CONTENIDOS
- DOME combinando cmara y zoom
- 24 VAC10% (60Hz 0.3Hz)
- 18W
- SISTEMA DE COLOR ESTNDAR NTSC
- 1/4 inch IT CCD
- 768(H) x 494(V)
- 525 lneas, 2:1 Entrelazado
- INT/LNEA BLOC
- 480 LINEAS
- 52dB (CAG OFF)
- 0.3 Lux (el Sentido Arriba X4)
(0.01 Lux)
- BA/BM/MANUAL MODE
(3200 K, 5600 K, R/B GAIN Regulable)
- VIDEO COMPUESTO 1.0 Vpp 75 Ohms/BNC
- zoom optico x22
- Longitud focal: 3.6 a 79.2 mm
- Apertura F1.6 (Wide) F3.8 (Tele)
- Auto enfoque
- Rango de Pan: 360 Giro continu
- Velocidad PAN Preset 240 /seg mximo
- Velocidad PAN Manual: 0.8 a 90/seg (64 pasos)
- Rango de TILT : 0 ~ 90
- Velocidad TILT Preset 150/seg mximo
- Velocidad TILT Manual : 0.8a 45/seg (64 pasos)
- Tele/Wide (ZUMBIDO), Cerac/Lejos (FOCO),
abrir/cerrar iris, pan/tilt
- Entradas de Alarma: 4 IN (5 mA sink)
- Salidas de Alarma: 3 salidas (Colector abierto : 2
DC24V 40mA Max, Rel : 1, NO, NC, COM 2A
30VDC, 0,5A 125VCA Mx)
- -10C ~ +50C (14F ~ 122F)
- ~90%
- DOMO: 147 mm dimetro
Exterior: 159.5 (dimetro) x 176 (H) (Adaptador: 23.5(H)mm)
- 2Kg
NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
ITEM
Tipo de producto
Alimentacin
Consumo
Tipo de transmisin
Dispositivo de imagen
Pxels eficaces
Modo de exploracion
Frecuencia de lnea de
exploracion
Modo en sincronizacin
Resolucin
S/N Ratio
Mn iluminacion
Temperatura de color
Salida de seal
Lente
Funcin PAN
Funcin TILT
CONTROL REMOTO
ALARMA
Temperatura de
operacion
Humedad de operacion
TAMAO
Peso
SCC-641
RESET CM
RESET CM borra todos los ajustes que se han hecho hasta el momento y restaura la
configuracin predeterminada de fbrica.
Aparece el mensaje RESET CMARA? cuando usted selecciona RESET CM.
Seleccione CANCELAR para regresar a la pantalla del men de configuracin o
seleccione OK para restaurar la configuracin predeterminada de fbrica.
G Tenga cuidado cuando efecte la operacin RESET CM, ya que sta elimina todos
valores de la configuracin.
3-27
Es
3-26
Atencin
El copyright del manual es propiedad de Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
El manual no se podr reproducir de forma electrnica, mecnica,
por audio o por cualquier otro mtodo sin la autorizacin de
Samsung Electronics.
Este manual se modificar dependiendo de las mejoras del producto.
Especificaciones de producto
CONTENIDOS
- DOME combinando cmara y zoom
- 24 VAC 10% (50Hz 0.3Hz)
- 18W
- SISTEMA DE COLOR ESTNDAR PAL
- 1/4 inch IT CCD
- 752(H) x 582(V)
- 625 lneas, 2:1 Entrelazado
- INT/LNEA BLOC
- 480 LINEAS
- 52dB (CAG OFF)
- 0.3 Lux (el Sentido Arriba X4)
(0.01 Lux)
- BA/BM/MANUAL MODE
(3200 K, 5600 K, R/B GAIN Regulable)
- VIDEO COMPUESTO 1.0 Vpp 75 Ohms/BNC
- zoom optico x22
- Longitud focal: 3.6 a 79.2 mm
- Apertura F1.6 (Wide) F3.8 (Tele)
- Auto enfoque
- Rango de Pan: 360 Giro continu
- Velocidad PAN Preset 240 /seg mximo
- Velocidad PAN Manual: 0.8 a 90/seg (64 pasos)
- Rango de TILT : 0 ~ 90
- Velocidad TILT Preset 150/seg mximo
- Velocidad TILT Manual : 0.8a 45/seg (64 pasos)
- Tele/Wide (ZUMBIDIO, Cerac/Lejos (FOCO),
abrir/cerrar iris, pan/tilt
- Entradas de Alarma: 4 IN (5 mA sink)
- Salidas de Alarma: 3 salidas (Colector abierto : 2
DC24V 40mA Max, Rel : 1, NO, NC, COM 2A
30VDC, 0,5A 125VCA Mx)
- -10C ~ +50C (14F ~ 122F)
- ~90%
- DOMO: 147 mm dimetro
Exterior: 159.5 (dimetro) x 176 (H) (Adaptador: 23.5(H)mm)
- 2Kg
NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
ITEM
Tipo de producto
Alimentacin
Consumo
Tipo de transmisin
Dispositivo de imagen
Pxels eficaces
Modo de exploracion
Frecuencia de lnea de
exploracion
Modo en sincronizacin
Resolucin
S/N Ratio
Mn iluminacion
Temperatura de color
Salida de seal
Lente
Funcin PAN
Funcin TILT
CONTROL REMOTO
ALARMA
Temperatura de
operacion
Humedad de operacion
TAMAO Peso
SCC-641P
I
SmartDome Camera
SCC-641(P)
Istruzioni per luso
I
Norme di sicurezza
Scopo di queste informazioni assicurare un uso corretto del prodotto per
evitare pericoli o danni alla propriet. Attenersi scrupolosamente a tutte le
norme di sicurezza.
* Le norme si suddividono in Avvertenze e Attenzione in base alla
seguente distinzione:
Avvertenza: la mancata osservanza di questo tipo di norme pu
provocare il decesso o gravi lesioni personali.
Attenzione: la mancata osservanza di questo tipo di norme pu
provocare lesioni o danni alla propriet.
Avvertenze: istruzioni che avvertono di
un possibile rischio di
morte o di gravi lesioni
personali.
Attenzione: istruzioni che avvertono di
un possibile rischio di lesioni
o danni alla propriet.
Attenzione
1. Non far cadere oggetti sul prodotto e non sottoporlo a forti colpi.
Conservare lapparecchio in un luogo non soggetto a vibrazioni eccessive
o a interferenze magnetiche.
2. Non installare la videocamera in ambienti soggetti a temperature troppo
elevate (superiori ai 50 gradi centigradi) o troppo basse (inferiori a - 10
gradi centigradi), oppure particolarmente umidi. (Cos facendo si
potrebbero provocare incendi o scariche elettriche).
3. Evitare di installare lapparecchio in luoghi esposti alla luce solare diretta o
in prossimit di fonti di calore come radiatori o caloriferi. (La mancata
osservanza di questa norma pu provocare il rischio di incendi.)
4. Se si desidera spostare un apparecchio gi installato, spegnere la corrente
prima di spostarlo o reinstallarlo.
5. Installare la telecamera in luoghi ben ventilati.
6. In caso di temporali con fulmini, staccare la spina elettrica dalla presa di
corrente. (La mancata osservanza di questa norma pu provocare incendi
o danni al prodotto.)
Avvertenza
1. Utilizzare esclusivamente l'adattatore in dotazione.
(Lutilizzo di adattatori diversi da quello in dotazione pu essere causa di
incendi, scariche elettriche o danni al prodotto.)
2. Quando si collega lalimentatore e i fili di trasmissione dei segnali,
controllare i terminali delle connessioni esterne prima di eseguire il
collegamento. Collegare i fili del segnale dallarme ai terminali
corrispondenti, ladattatore AC alla presa di ingresso della corrente
alternata (AC), e ladattatore DC allingresso di corrente diretta (DC),
rispettando le polarit. (Il collegamento non corretto dellalimentatore pu
provocare incendi, scariche elettriche o danni al prodotto.)
3. Non collegare pi telecamere a un solo adattatore.
(Un eventuale sovraccarico pu provocare la generazione di calore
anomalo o provocare incendi.) (Leventuale caduta della telecamera
potrebbe provocare lesioni personali).
4. Inserire correttamente il cavo di alimentazione nellapposita presa di
corrente. (Un collegamento non corretto pu essere causa di incendi.)
5. Quando si installa la telecamera a muro o a soffitto, fissare lapparecchio in
modo sicuro. (Leventuale caduta della telecamera potrebbe provocare
lesioni personali).
6. Non appoggiare alla telecamera oggetti con capacit conduttive (cacciaviti,
monete e oggetti in metallo) o contenitori pieni dacqua.
(La mancata osservanza di questa norma pu provocare lesioni personali
dovute a incendi e scariche elettriche o alla caduta di oggetti.)
7. Non installare lapparecchio in ambienti fuligginosi, polverosi o umidi.
(Cos facendo si potrebbero provocare incendi o scariche elettriche).
8. Nel caso in cui dallunit dovessero uscire odori inconsueti o fumo,
sospendere luso del prodotto.
Scollegare immediatamente dalla sorgente di alimentazione e rivolgersi al
centro di assistenza. (Se si continua a utilizzare lapparecchio in tali
condizioni esiste il rischio di provocare incendi o scariche elettriche).
9. In caso di funzionamento anomalo del prodotto, rivolgersi al punto di
vendita in cui si acquistato lapparecchio oppure al centro di assistenza
pi vicino. Non smontare n modificare il prodotto in alcun modo.
(Samsung non responsabile di problemi causati da alterazioni non
autorizzate o da tentativi di riparare lapparecchio.)
10. Durante la pulizia, non spruzzare acqua direttamente sulle parti del
prodotto. (Cos facendo si potrebbero provocare incendi o scariche
elettriche). Pulire la superficie con un panno asciutto. Non utilizzare mai
detergenti o sostanze chimiche per la pulizia del prodotto, in quanto
potrebbero provocare lo scolorimento della superficie o causare danni alle
finiture.
1-2 1-1
I
Nota bene: il presente dispositivo stato sperimentato e dichiarato conforme ai
requisiti per gli apparecchi digitali di Classe B, come previsto dalla sezione 15
delle norme della Commissione Federale delle Comunicazioni (FCC). Tali
requisiti si propongono di tutelare lutente contro eventuali interferenze
dannose dovute ad installazioni in ambiente residenziale. Questo dispositivo
genera, utilizza e pu irradiare energia in radiofrequenza e, se non installato ed
utilizzato secondo le istruzioni, potrebbe provocare interferenze dannose nei
confronti delle radiocomunicazioni.
Tuttavia, non possibile garantire che tale interferenza non abbia luogo su di
una particolare installazione. Qualora questo dispositivo causasse interferenze
dannose alla ricezione radio-televisiva, che possono determinarsi in fase di
accensione e spegnimento del dispositivo stesso, si invita lutente a tentare di
ridurre linterferenza effettuando una o pi delle seguenti operazioni:
- Modificare lorientamento o la posizione dellantenna di ricezione.
- Aumentare la distanza tra il dispositivo e il ricevitore.
- Connettere il dispositivo ad una presa su di un circuito diverso da quello a cui
connesso il ricevitore.
- Rivolgersi al rivenditore o ad un tecnico radiotelevisivo esperto.
Riconoscimento degli standard
Prima delluso
Questo manuale fornisce le istruzioni di base per lutente della
telecamera modello SCC-641(P). Contiene tutte le istruzioni
necessarie per lutilizzo del modello SCC-641(P), a partire da una
semplice introduzione alla collocazione e alle funzioni dei
comandi, fino alle modalit di installazione contenute nel men di
Set-up.
Si consiglia a tutti gli utenti del modello SCC-641(P), sia quelli
esperti che hanno gi utilizzato simili telecamere in precedenza,
sia quelli meno esperti, di leggere il manuale prima delluso.
Il comando del modello SCC-641(P) che si utilizza con maggiore
frequenza il men di Set-up. Il men di Set-up del modello
SCC-641(P) descritto dettagliatamente al Capitolo 3
Descrizione del Men di Set-up.
Lutilit di questo manuale di istruzioni massima qualora venga
letto dallinizio alla fine: tuttavia, per gli utenti che desiderino
consultarne soltanto determinate le sezioni, vengono forniti di
seguito gli indici dei Capitoli.
Il Capitolo 1 Descrizione di SCC-641(P) fornisce una breve
introduzione al modello SCC-641(P), corredata di denominazione
e funzioni delle singole componenti, nonch delle Impostazioni di
selezione.
Il Capitolo 2 Installazione di SCC-641(P) spiega le procedure
di installazione del modello SCC-641(P) e descrive i requisiti
ambientali di preparazione ed installazione.
Il Capitolo 3 Descrizione del men di Set-up presenta la
struttura del men di Set-up di SCC-641(P), con spiegazioni
dettagliate delle funzioni relative a ciascun sotto-men.
L Appendice A Specifiche di prodotto SCC-641(P) illustra le
caratteristiche specifiche del prodotto SCC-641(P) in categorie
suddivise voce per voce.
1-4
I
1-3
-SHUTTER 3-10
-AGC 3-11
-BAL BIANCO 3-12
-SPECIAL 3-14
-AUTO FOCUS 3-15
-D-ZOOM 3-15
-USCITA 3-15
PRESET 3-16
AUTOMODE 3-18
-AUTO PAN 3-18
-PERCORSO 3-20
-PROG ALLARMI 3-21
ALTRA PROG 3-23
Specifiche di prodotto 3-25
Indice
Prima delluso 1-1
Capitolo 1 Descrizione di SCC-641 (P) 1-5
Introduzione al modello SCC-641 (P) 1-6
Collocazione dei comandi di SCC-641 (P) 1-7
Collocazione dei comandi di SCC-641 (P) Fronte 1-7
Collocazione dei comandi di SCC-641 (P) Retro 1-8
CONNESSIONE ADATTATORE 1-9
IMPOSTAZIONI PRELIMINARI 1-10
Impostazioni di terminazione RS-422A/RS-485 1-11
IMPOSTAZIONI DI SELEZIONE 1-12
Capitulo 2 Installazione di SCC-641 (P) 2-1
Controllo del contenuto della scatola 2-2
Precauzioni di installazione e uso 2-3
Preparazione dei cavi 2-5
Connessione dei cavo 2-6
Installazione di SCC-641 (P) 2-7
Capitulo 3 Descrizione del men di Setup 3-1
Struttura del men di Setup 3-2
MEN CAMERA: Contenuti 3-5
-ID CAMERA 3-5
-SYNC 3-6
-VEL ZOOM 3-6
-ACTIVITY DET 3-7
-USCITA 3-8
MENU PROG VIDEO 3-9
-IRIS 3-9
1-6
I
1-5
Introduzione al modello SCC-641 (P)
Il modello SCC-641 (P) la migliore telecamera di sorveglianza integrata a
zoom variabile. Pu essere utilizzato insieme alle telecamere a circuito
chiuso in banche o uffici e garantisce un elevato livello di sicurezza.
Il modello SCC-641 (P) una telecamera di sorveglianza ad alta qualit che
utilizza un obiettivo focale x22 ed uno zoom digitale IC che consente di
migliorare la definizione delle immagini fino a 220 volte.
Il modello SCC-641 (P) comprende una funzione Bassa luminosit (Low
Light) che consente di rilevare immagini anche in ambienti quasi
completamente bui; comprende altres una funzione di Bilanciamento del
bianco che corregge limmagine naturale a seconda della luce di sottofondo;
una funzione di Compensazione contro-luce che consente una nitida visione
degli oggetti anche con un forte contro-luce, nonch una funzione Autofocus
che regola la focalizzazione a seconda dei movimenti delloggetto. Si tratta di
una telecamera multifunzionale che comprende tutte le funzioni fondamentali
offerte dalle altre telecamere di sorveglianza.
Il modello SCC-641 (P) dispone di una funzione di Allarme per le situazioni di
allerta; per spostare la telecamera nella direzione desiderata, possibile
controllare le funzioni ZOOM-IN e ZOOM-OUT anche a distanza.
Capitolo 1: Descrizione di SCC-641 (P)
In questo capitolo, vengono brevemente illustrati il modello
SCC-641 (P), le sue funzioni principali, la collocazione dei
comandi e le Impostazioni di selezione.
1-8
I
1-7
RETRO
Collocazione dei comandi
FRONTE
1-10
I
1-9
relay esterno
Tabla de adaptador de la SCC-641(P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
BAUD RATE
4800 BPS
9600 BPS
19200 BPS
38400 BPS
PIN 3
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
PIN 4
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
A : SAMSUNG(SSC-1000)HALF
B: SAMSUNG (SSC-1000) PIENO
PIN5 PIN6 PIN7 PIN8
A OFF OFF OFF OFF
B ON OFF OFF OFF
C OFF ON OFF OFF
D ON ON OFF OFF
E OFF OFF ON OFF
F ON OFF ON OFF
G OFF ON ON OFF
H ON ON ON OFF
I OFF OFF OFF ON
J ON OFF OFF ON
K OFF ON OFF ON
L ON ON OFF ON
M OFF OFF ON ON
N ON OFF ON ON
O OFF ON ON ON
P ON ON ON ON
PIN
Comp
SW501
SW500
(VISTA INFERIORE)
CONSULTARE IL MANUALE
DISTRUZIONI
IMPOSTAZIONI PRELIMINARI
CONFIGURAZIONE SET-UP TELECAMERA
Limpostazione del commutatore DIP-switch corrisponde allesempio sottostante.
Es. Indirizzo telecamera (CAMERA ADDR):
se su 1, regolare le impostazioni come nel riquadro.
Impostazioni del Protocollo di comunicazione.
Utilizzare il numero PIN 5~8 del modulo SW 501 per impostare il Protocollo di
comunicazione.
Impostazione della velocit di trasmissione
Utilizzare i PIN 3 e 4 di SW501.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
SW500
1-12
I
1-11
IMPOSTAZIONI DI SELEZIONE
identificativo ricevitore
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
SW500-1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SW500-2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW500-3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-5
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-6
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-7
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-8
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Impostazioni di terminazione RS-422A/RS-485
Come illustrato nella mappa della struttura, quando il Controller e il modulo RS 422A/RS-
485 sono connessi, le operazioni di terminazione debbono essere effettuate in base
allimpedenza opposta dal cavo in ognuna delle uscite della linea di trasmissione, al fine
di trasferire i segnali a lunga distanza controllando per la riflessione del segnale a
bassa distanza.
<RS-485 in semi-duplex>
n < 128
Terminazione
SW1-ON
Divisione
Terminazione: utilizzare i numeri 1 e 2 PIN, selezionare ON e la procedura sar terminata.
<RS-422A/RS-485 in duplex>
Divisione
Divisione
SW1-ON
SW2-ON
n < 128
ATTENZIONE
se pi telecamere sono state impostate con il medesimo indirizzo,
pu verificarsi un Errore di comunicazione.
1-14
I
1-13
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
SW500-1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SW500-2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW500-3
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-5
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-6
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-7
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-8
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
SW500-1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SW500-2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW500-3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-4
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-5
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-6
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-7
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-8
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
1-16
I
1-15
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
SW500-1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SW500-2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW500-3
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-4
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-5
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-7
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-6
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
SW500-1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SW500-2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW500-3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-5
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW500-6
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-7
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
2-2
I
2-1
Prima dellinstallazione
Controllo del contenuto della scatola
Controllare che tutte le componenti sotto elencate siano presenti nella scatola:
SCC-641(P) Mensola di supporto
Porta-telecamera
Coperchio di rivestimento
Capitolo 2: Installazione di SCC-641 (P)
In questo capitolo, ci concentreremo sui controlli da effettuarsi prima di
procedere allinstallazione; sui requisiti ambientali per linstallazione;
sulle precauzioni da prendersi durante la procedura di installazione del
modello SCC-641 (P). In seguito, illustreremo la procedura di
installazione di SCC-641 (P) e la connessione dei cavi.
Manuale dellutente
2-4
I
2-3
Non posizionare SCC-641 (P) contro la luce del sole.
Sia in funzione, sia spenta, SCC-641 (P) non deve mai stare rivolta verso la
luce del sole. SCC-641 (P) va usata con cautela nelle vicinanze di riflettori o
di altre fonti di luce, nonch di oggetti che riflettano la luce.
SCC-641 (P) deve essere utilizzata in ambiente stabile. Le condizioni
ambientali compatibili con il funzionamento sono indicati qui di seguito:
Temperatura: -10 C ~ + 50 C (pari a 14 F ~ 122 F)
Tasso di umidit: non oltre il 90%
Occorre disporre di una rete elettrica idonea, da utilizzarsi secondo le
caratteristiche specifiche del sistema di alimentazione elettrico di
SCC-641 (P).
Energia consumata: 18 W
Potenza impegnata: 24 V a corrente alternata; 1.5 A
Precauzioni di installazione e uso
Non cercare di disassemblare SCC-641 (P).
Rimuovendo le viti o il coperchio, si rischia una scossa elettrica. Lutente dovr
evitare di maneggiare linterno di SCC-641 (P). Qualora si rendesse
necessario controllare linterno del dispositivo, contattare un distributore
autorizzato.
Maneggiare SCC-641 (P) con cautela.
SCC-641 (P) un prodotto durevole: la cautela nellutilizzo ne allunga
ulteriormente la durata e previene i guasti. Evitare di scuotere o di comprimere
la telecamera per prevenire danni al prodotto: maneggiare e riporre secondo le
istruzioni.
Non esporre SCC-641 (P) alla pioggia o allumidit. Non utilizzare in
presenza di acqua.
In caso di contatto con acqua, spegnere immediatamente SCC-641 (P) e
contattare un distributore autorizzato. Lumidit pu danneggiare SCC-641 (P)
e aumenta il rischio di scossa elettrica.
Non utilizzare detersivi o agenti abrasivi per pulire il corpo principale di
SCC-641 (P).
Qualora il corpo principale di SCC-641 (P) necessitasse di pulizia, utilizzare un
panno asciutto per pulire lunit. Qualora lo sporco sia difficile da rimuovere,
utilizzare un detersivo delicato e strofinare delicatamente.
2-6
I
2-5
Connessione del cavo
1. Per prima cosa, connettere unestremit del cavo connettore con innesto a baionetta
al terminale video (VIDEO OUT).
2. Quindi connettere laltra estremit del connettore alla porta di connessione del
monitor.
3.Connettere ora il cavo adattatore. Utilizzare un cacciavite per avvitare una parte delle
due linee delladattatore al terminale di alimentazione di SCC-641 (P).
4. Regolare lo switch posto sotto ladattatore per ottenere la tensione desiderata. Poi,
connettere la presa delladattatore al connettore di alimentazione.
5. Connettere il terminale di controllo a distanza (Remote Control) di SCC-641 (P) con
il Controller esterno.
Per installare SCC-641 (P), occorre predisporre i seguenti cavi.
Cavo delladattatore
Lillustrazione sottostante rappresenta il cavo connesso al terminale di alimentazione di
SCC-641 (P), con una tensione nominale di 24 V a corrente alternata e una portata in
regime permanente di 1.5 A.
Cavo video
Il cavo di SCC-641 (P) un cavo con innesto a baionetta (BNC) che connette il terminale
video (video output) con la porta di connessione (video input) del monitor.
Preparazione dei cavi
2-8
I
2-7
1. [Figura 1] Installare la struttura sul soffitto
(Fare riferimento alle istruzioni di Installazione per valutare la lunghezza della
struttura)
* Realizzato sul posto dal costruttore della struttura
3. [Figura 2] Assemblare la MENSOLA DI SUPPORTO sul soffitto, avvitando i 4 bulloni.
Installazione di SCC-641 (P)
[figura 2]
[figura 1]
2. Realizzare unapertura sul soffitto nella posizione in cui si intende installare la telecamera
(lapertura deve misurare circa180)
5. [Figura 5] Incastrare la MENSOLA DI SUPPORTO e lADATTATORE DELLA
TELECAMERA ed utilizzare 4 bulloni (PH M4X8) per assemblarli.
[figura 5]
4. [Figure 3-4] Connettere i vari cavi allADATTATORE DELLA TELECAMERA (vedi
pagg. 2-6)
[figura 4]
[figura 3]
ampiezza dellapertura sul soffitto
3-1
I
Capitolo 3: Descrizione del men di Setup
In questo capitolo, ci concentreremo sul men di Setup di SCC-641
(P). Per prima cosa, vedremo la struttura del men nel suo complesso,
per poi soffermarci sulle funzioni di ogni singolo men.
2-9
6. [Figura 6] Incastrare i 3 fori sul retro della TELECAMERA con il CONNETTORE e girare di
circa 15 gradi a sinistra. [Attendere di sentire lo scatto che segnala lavvenuto incastro e
controllare che la leva di incastro (lever locking) sia nella posizione di incastro]
* Utilizzare le viti (BH M3XL8) per connettere la TELECAMERA con lADATTATORE
affinch non si muovano.
[figura 6]
7. [Figura 7] Assemblare il COPRI-CALOTTA sulla CALOTTA.
[[figura 7]
3-3
I
3-2
MODO AUTO AUTO PAN ...
PROG PERCORSO 1/2/3
PROG ALLARMI PROG ALLARMI PRIORITA ALLARMI1 1~4
ALLARMI2 1~4
ALLARMI3 1~4
ALLARMI4 1~4
USCITA ESCI/SALVA
PROG ALLARMI IN ALLARMI1 OFF/NO/NC
ALLARMI1 OFF/NO/NC
ALLARMI1 OFF/NO/NC
ALLARMI1 OFF/NO/NC
USCITA ESCI/SALVA
PROG ALLARMI OUT ALLARMI1 1~3
ALLARMI2 1~3
ALLARMI3 1~3
ALLARMI4 1~3
ACTIVITY 1~3
USCITA ESCI/SALVA
PROG ALLARMI PERCORSO ALLARMI1 OFF/1~3/HALF1/HALF2/PIENO
ALLARMI2 OFF/1~3/HALF1/HALF2/PIENO
ACTIVITY OFF/1~3/HALF1/HALF2/PIENO
USCITA ESCI/SALVA
CON USCITA AUX OUT1 OFF
OUT2 OFF
OUT3 OFF
USCITA ESCI/SALVA
ALTRA PROG AC OFF/6ORA/12ORA/18ORA/24ORA
P.P/T ON/OFF
RIT POS INIZ OFF/1~60MIN/2~12ORA
POS INIZIALE 0~127
AUTO 180 OFF/ON
CAM RESET
LINGUA ITALIANO
USCITA ESCI/SALVA
CAMERA ID CAMERA OFF/ON...
SYNC INT/LINE...
VEL ZOOM 1/2/3/4
ACTIVITY DET OFF/ON...
USCITA ESCI/SALVA/PRESET
SHUTTER OFF/1/100~1/10K/AUTO/FISSO
AGC OFF/ON
BIL BIANCO ATW/AWC/MANU...
SPECIALE OFF/ON... POSI/NEGA +/-
PIP OFF/ON...
MIRROR OFF/ON
DTL ORR (0)----I--
DTL VER (0)---I---
RET
AUTO FOCUS AF/MF/UNOAF
D-ZOOM OFF/X2~X10
USCITA ESCI/SALVA/PRESET
PRESET PROG POSIZIONE ...
ID PRESET ON.../OFF
SCANSIONE ON/OFF
TEMPO DI SCAN 1~60SEC
USCITA ESCI/SALVA/ELIMINA
Struttura del men di Setup
3-5
I
3-4
MENU PROG CAMERA
Il men Camera comprende un sottomen PROG CAMERA e un sottomen
PROG VIDEO
ID CAMERA
Il men ID CAMERA assegna a SCC-641 (P) un numero di identificazione che compare
sul monitor in stato di connessione. Dal men PROG CAMERA, posizionare il cursore su
ID CAMERA, selezionare ON e premere [Enter]. A questo punto, viene visualizzata una
schermata per la scelta del numero di identificazione di SCC-641 (P). ID Camera
dispone di 12 caratteri alfanumerici, pi svariati caratteri speciali. Il numero di
identificazione potr essere collocato sullo schermo nella posizione desiderata,
utilizzando il sottomen POSIZIONE.
premere
[Enter]
.... indica la presenza di sottomen
Il diagramma soprastante rappresenta la struttura del men di Setup nel suo
complesso. In questa sezione, verr offerta una descrizione delle
caratteristiche del men di Setup, per permettere a ciascun utente di
personalizzare SCC-641 (P) secondo le proprie necessit.
(PROG CAMERA)
ID CAMERA OFF
SYNC INT
VEL ZOOM 3
ACTIVITY DET OFF
USCITA ESCI
(PROG VIDEO)
IRIS ALC...
SHUTTER OFF
AGC ON
BIL BIANCO ATW
SPECIALE OFF
AUTO FOCUS UNOAF
D-ZOOM OFF
USCITA ESCI
(PROG CAMERA)
ID CAMERA ON...
SYNC INT
VEL ZOOM 3
ACTIVITY DET OFF
USCITA ESCI
(ID CAMERA)
Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
: ! - + ( ) /
SP SP
POSIZIONE...
RET
SCC-641P.....
3-7
I
3-6
ACTIVITY DET
Con ACTIVITY DET, si pu impostare la funzione di Motion Detection (rilevazione del
movimento), detta Motion Detection Sensitivity, e anche larea di rilevazione di movimento. Se
impostata la funzione di Motion Detection, possibile rilevare i movimenti di un eventuale
intruso. Una volta rilevato il movimento, la funzione innesca automaticamente il segnale di
allarme del Controller.
Selezionare ON e premere [Enter]: comparir il sottomen di ACTIVITY DET. Il men
ZONA, ossia larea dello schermo su cui si vuole che venga applicata la funzione di
rilevazione del movimento, pu essere impostata in modalit PRESET (predefinita) o UTIL
(personalizzata). Se il men ZONA impostato su PRESET, la funzione di Motion Detection
sar applicata sulle parti fondamentali dello schermo SCC-641 (P) predefinite. Spostando il
cursore del men ZONA su UTIL e premendo [ENTER], lutente potr scegliere lampiezza e
la collocazione dellarea dove applicare la funzione di rilevazione del movimento. Quando
larea non lampeggia, si possono usare i pulsanti [Left, sinistro; Right, destro; Up, alto; e Down,
basso] per spostare ed impostare la lampiezza desiderata. Premendo [ENTER] quando il
cursore non lampeggia, inizier a lampeggiare, e si potranno quindi utilizzare i pulsanti [Left,
sinistro; Right, destro; Up, alto; e Down, basso] per impostare posizione dellarea. Utilizzare i
pulsanti [ENTER] e [Left, Right, Up, Down] per impostare la posizione e lampiezza dellarea di
Motion Detection. Premendo nuovamente [ENTER], si esce dal men delle impostazioni di
ZONA. Utilizzare il men SENSIBILITA per impostare il grado di sensibilit della funzione
Motion Detection. Pi si aumenta laltezza, maggiore sar la sensibilit della funzione di
rilevazione del movimento.
Usare i pulsanti
premere
[Enter]
Utilizzare i pulsanti [Left, sinistro; Right, destro; Up, alto; Down, basso]
La funzione di Motion Detection non si attiva quando si utilizzano le funzioni SHUTTER,
PRESET, SCANSIONE, PERCORSO, MODE o JOYSTICK in modalit slow (lenta).
SYNC
Dal men SYNC possibilie selezionare la sincronia
verticale. Il segnale di sincronia verticale supportato da
SCC-641 (P) comprende una modalit INT offerta dal
temporizzatore interno di SCC-641 (P), e una modalit
LINE che regola la sincronia verticale in base alla
frequenza della rete di alimentazione esterna.
Selezionare LINE e premere [Enter]. Comparir il sottomen LINE LOCK, dal quale si
pu regolare la fase di LINE LOCK. Si pu utilizzare il men FASE del sottomen LINE
LOCK per assegnare la fase desiderata.
VEL ZOOM
Con il men VEL ZOOM si pu scegliere la velocit del
pulsante zoom (Tele/Wide). Utilizzare i pulsanti sinistro
o destro del men VEL ZOOM per selezionare la
velocit desiderata.
1: Ingrandimento x22 in circa 17 secondi: velocit
minima
2: Ingrandimento x22 in circa 10 secondi: bassa
velocit
3: Ingrandimento x22 in circa 6 secondi: alta velocit
4: Ingrandimento x22 in circa 3 secondi: velocit
massima
premere
[Enter]
(PROG CAMERA)
ID CAMERA OFF
SYNC INT
VEL ZOOM 3
ACTIVITY DET OFF
USCITA ESCI
(PROG CAMERA)
ID CAMERA OFF
SYNC LINE...
VEL ZOOM 3
ACTIVITY DET OFF
USCITA ESCI
(LINE LOCK)
FASE (000) ----I ----
RET
(PROG CAMERA)
ID CAMERA OFF
SYNC INT
VEL ZOOM 3
ACTIVITY DET OFF
USCITA ESCI
(PROG CAMERA)
ID CAMERA OFF
SYNC INT
VEL ZOOM 3
ACTIVITY DET OFF
USCITA ESCI
(ACTIVITY DET)
ZONA PRESET...
SENSIBILITA MEDIO
RET
DIMENSIONE
POSIZIONE
DIMENSIONE
POSIZIONE
3-9
I
3-8
MENU PROG VIDEO
IRIS
Il livello di output video (attivit video) del monitor pu essere controllato dalla lente IRIS
(lente con obiettivo a diaframma), in base al livello di luce. Il livello di output video pu
essere impostato in modalit ALC (Compensazione Automatica di Luce). Lapertura e la
chiusura della lente Iris pu essere definita manualmente utilizzando il men MANU.
BLC (sottomen del men ALC/MANU)
Con le telecamere convenzionali, una forte luce di sottofondo interferisce con la
chiarezza delle immagini, facendole apparire scure. Con SCC-641 (P), impostando la
funzione BLC (Compensazione contro-luce) dal sottomen ALC/MANU, il problema della
luce di sottofondo risolto e la visione sullo schermo rimane nitida.
ALC (Compensazione Automatica di Luce)
Selezionare ALC alla voce IRIS e premere [ENTER]; comparir il sottomen del livello di
output video e BLC (Compensazione contro-luce). Il livello di output video pu essere
determinato utilizzando i pulsanti [Left, Right]. Posizionare il cursore BLC su ON e la
Compensazione contro-luce verr applicata alle aree del teleschermo selezionate con la
funzione ZONA. Larea dello schermo su cui si desidera applicare la Compensazione
contro-luce pu essere determinata con le funzioni PRESET o UTIL. Se il men ZONA
impostato su PRESET, la compensazione di controluce verr effettuata sulle aree
predefinite dalla casa costruttrice di SCC-641 (P). Se, al contrario, il men ZONA si trova
su UTIL e si preme [ENTER], lutente stesso pu scegliere larea in cui applicare la
compensazione di contro-luce.
Quando il cursore non lampeggia, si possono usare i pulsanti [Left, Right, Up, Down] per
spostare ed impostare la lampiezza desiderata. Premendo [ENTER] quando il cursore
non lampeggia, inizier a lampeggiare, e si potranno quindi utilizzare i pulsanti
[Left, Right, Up, Down] per impostare posizione dellarea. Utilizzare [ENTER] e i pulsanti
[Left, Right, Up, Down] per impostare la posizione e lampiezza dellarea di Motion
Detection. Premendo nuovamente [ENTER], si esce dal men delle impostazioni di
ZONA.
premere
[Enter]
USCITA
Il men USCITA si usa per uscire dal men CAMERA di SCC-641 (P) e tornare al
MAIN MENU (men principale).
-ESCI: ignora le informazioni modificate e ripristina le informazioni precedentemente
salvate.
-SALVA: salva le informazioni sulle impostazioni del men.
-PRESET: ignora le informazioni modificate e ripristina le caratteristiche di men
predefinite dalla casa produttrice.
(PROG CAMERA)
ID CAMERA OFF
SYNC INT
VEL ZOOM 3
ACTIVITY DET OFF
USCITA ESCI
(PROG VIDEO)
IRIS ALC...
SHUTTER OFF
AGC ON
BAL BIANCO ATW
SPECIALE OFF
AUTO FOCUS UNOAF
D-ZOOM OFF
USCIDA DEJAR
(ALC)
ZONA UTIL...
BLC OFF
LIVELLO (0) ----I ----
RET
3-11
I
3-10
Tenendo premuti i pulsanti Left/Right, la velocit verr illustrata come indicato nel riquadro.
OFF 1/100(1/120) 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000
FISSO X2 FISSO X4 FISSO X6 FISSO X8 FISSO X12 FISSO X16
FISSO X24FISSO X32 FISSO X48 FISSO X64 FISSO X96 FISSO X128
AGC (Controllo di guadagno automatico)
Dal men AGC (Controllo di guadagno automatico), si pu impostare automaticamente il
guadagno quando la luminosit dellimmagine a schermo sia maggiore delle condizioni di
bassa luminosit standard. Per controllare automaticamente la funzione GAIN (guadagno),
impostare il men AGC su ON, oppure impostarlo su OFF per controllarlo manualmente. Se
il men dello SHUTTER (otturatore) si trova in modalit AUTO low speed shutter (otturatore
automatico a bassa velocit), il valore del men AGC non pu essere modificato.
MANU
Se la funzione IRIS su MANU, comparir sullo schermo una finestra per aprire e
chiudere la lente Iris manualmente. Utilizzare i pulsanti [Left, Right] nella funzione
LIVELLO per impostare manualmente la funzione Iris.
Usare i pulsanti
SHUTTER
Dal men SHUTTER, possibile impostare lo shutter (otturatore) elettrico ad alta velocit,
nonch lo shutter AUTO (automatico) a bassa velocit di SCC-641 (P) e lo shutter FISSO a
bassa velocit. Lotturatore elettrico ad alta velocit supporta 7 velocit diverse da 1/100 a
1/10.000 al secondo. Gli otturatori AUTO e FISSO a bassa velocit supportano 12 velocit
diverse, aumentabili da 2 a 128 volte. Lotturatore a bassa velocit (Low speed shutter) la
funzione che imposta lotturatore a bassa velocit, in modo da vedere chiaramente loggetto
filmato anche in carenza di luce. Per rallentare automaticamente la velocit dellotturatore,
facendo s che lapparecchio rilevi la quantit di luce, impostare lotturatore a bassa velocit
su AUTO. Se lutente desidera selezionare la velocit dellotturatore, lo imposter su FISSO.
Il numero che segue AUTO e FISSO indica il numero dei campi memorizzati. Maggiore il
numero dei campi, pi lenta sar la velocit dellotturatore: in questo modo, i fotogrammi fissi
appariranno pi nitidi sullo schermo.
Se loggetto in movimento, limmagine sar invece mossa.
premere
[Enter]
DIMENSIONE
POSIZIONE
DIMENSIONE
POSIZIONE
(PROG VIDEO)
IRIS MANU...
SHUTTER OFF
AGC ON
BIL BIANCO ATW
SPECIALE OFF
AUTO FOCUS UNOAF
D-ZOOM OFF
USCITA ESCI
(MANUALE)
LIVELLO (00) ----I ----
RET
(PROG VIDEO)
IRIS MANU...
SHUTTER OFF
AGC ON
BIL BIANCO ATW
SPECIALE OFF
AUTO FOCUS UNOAF
D-ZOOM OFF
USCITA ESCI
(PROG VIDEO)
IRIS MANU...
SHUTTER OFF
AGC ON
BIL BIANCO ATW
SPECIALE OFF
AUTO FOCUS UNOAF
D-ZOOM OFF
USCITA ESCI
3-13
I
3-12
BIL BIANCO
Il men di BIL BIANCO serve perch il bianco sia calibrato in modo normale a qualunque
temperatura di colore. Quando il men di BIL BIANCO si trova in modalit ATW, il
bilanciamento del bianco viene specificato automaticamente a seconda della
temperatura di colore. Qualora limpostazione del men di BIL BIANCO corrisponda
invece alla modalit AWC, occorre premere [ENTER] tenendo un foglio di carta bianca
davanti alla telecamera per impostare automaticamente il bilanciamento del bianco a
seconda della temperatura di colore. Loperazione va eseguita una sola volta.
Se il men di BIL BIANCO impostato sulla modalit MANUALE, lutente potr
impostare il bilanciamento del bianco a seconda dellilluminazione del momento.
- 3200 K: impostare la temperatura di colore su 3200 K
- 5600 K: impostare la temperatura di colore su 5600 K
- UTIL: impostare il valore opportuno, nella tabella ROSSO e BLU
MANU: selezionando la funzione MANU e premendo [ENTER], comparir la finestra
dalla quale si potr selezionare il bilanciamento del bianco manuale.
Utilizzare i pulsanti Left/Right per selezionare 3200 K, 5600 K o la modalit UTIL nel
men PRESET.
premere
[Enter]
BIL BIANCO
I gradi di luminosit sono generalmente indicati come temperature di colore, ed
espresse in gradi Kelvin (K).
Le temperature di colore generali in relazione alla luminosit sono elencate qui sotto.
Cielo sereno
Pioggia
Cielo nuvoloso
Cielo parzialmente
nuvoloso
Soleggiato
Lampada fluorescente
lampadina al tungsteno
Lume di candela
Lampada alogena
1000K
2000K
3000K
4000K
5000K
6000K
7000K
8000K
9000K
10000K
(PROG VIDEO)
IRIS MANU...
SHUTTER OFF
AGC ON
BIL BIANCO MANU...
SPECIALE OFF
AUTO FOCUS UNOAF
D-ZOOM OFF
USCITA ESCI
(ABB/MANUALE)
PRESET OFF(UTIL)..
ROSSO (0) ----I ----
BLU (0) ----I ----
RET
3-15
I
3-14
AUTO FOCUS
Nel men AUTO FOCUS, il metodo di focalizzazione pu essere AF, MF, UNOAF.
- AF: la modalit AUTO FOCUS: controllando lo schermo, ci si accorge che la
focalizzazione avviene automaticamente. Se si spostano i cursori dello zoom, la
funzione focalizza automaticamente su FOCUS e non necessario inserire input
manuali.
- MF: il sistema di focalizzazione manuale: lutente regola il Focus manualmente.
- UNOAF: nella modalit UNOAF, SCC-641 (P) focalizza automaticamente solo quando si
muove o si arresta. Quando SCC-641 (P) non in movimento, la funzione
identica alla modalit MF, mentre quando in movimento o in fase di arresto,
identica ad AF.
Utilizzare i pulsanti Left/Right per selezionare AF, MF o UNOAF dal men AUTO FOCUS.
D-ZOOM
Con il men D-ZOOM si pu selezionare lingrandimento dello zoom digitale.
Si pu scegliere un ingrandimento da OFF fino a 10 volte.
Quando la funzione Digital Zoom selezionata per un ingrandimento di 10 volte, lo
Zoom Ottico ingrandisce limmagine di 22 volte: pertanto, la telecamera in grado di
filmare con un ingrandimento fino a 220 volte.
Utilizzare i pulsanti [Left, Right] per selezionare lingrandimento desiderato dal men D-
ZOOM.
USCITA
Questa funzione identica alla funzione USCITA del men PROG CAMERA .
SPECIALE
Dal men SPECIALE, si possono regolare le funzioni POSI/NEGA, PIP, MIRROR e il
livello di dettaglio orizzontale e verticale.
-POSI/NEGA: il segnale di output video viene emesso in modalit normale/ inversa.
-PIP (Immagine nellimmagine): quando attivo lo zoom digitale, compare uno
schermo miniaturizzato in rapporto 1/16.
-MIRROR: inverte il segnale output video.
-DTL ORR: regola il livello di dettaglio orizzontale.
-DTL VER: regola il livello di dettaglio verticale.
Selezionare ON e premere [ENTER]: comparir il sottomen SPECIALE per scegliere
le funzioni speciali desiderate.
Per scegliere le funzioni, utilizzare i pulsanti Left/Right per selezionare una funzione.
Nel men PIP, selezionare ON e premere [ENTER]. Utilizzare i pulsanti [Left, Right,
Up, Down] per impostare la collocazione della funzione PIP.
PIP Screen
premere
[Enter]
premere
[Enter]
Il PIP non funziona nella modalit SHUTTER low speed (otturatore a bassa velocit)
Anche quanto attiva la funzione Mirror, il Mirror non funziona nelle finestre PIP.
(PROG VIDEO)
IRIS ALC...
SHUTTER OFF
AGC ON
BIL BIANCO ATW
SPECIALE ON...
AUTO FOCUS UNOAF
D-ZOOM OFF
USCITA ESCI
(SPECIALE)
POSI/NEGA +/-
PIP OFF
MIRROR OFF
DTL ORR (0) ---- I ---
DTL VER (0) --- I ----
RET
(SPECIALE)
POSI/NEGA +/-
PIP ON...
MIRROR OFF
DTL ORR (0) --- I -----
DTL VER (0) --- I -----
RET
(PROG VIDEO)
IRIS ALC...
SHUTTER OFF
AGC ON
BIL BIANCO ATW
SPECIALE ON...
AUTO FOCUS UNOAF
D-ZOOM OFF
USCITA ESCI
(PROG VIDEO)
IRIS ALC...
SHUTTER OFF
AGC ON
BIL BIANCO ATW
SPECIALE ON...
AUTO FOCUS UNOAF
D-ZOOM OFF
USCITA ESCI
(PROG VIDEO)
IRIS ALC...
SHUTTER OFF
AGC ON
BIL BIANCO ATW
SPECIALE ON...
AUTO FOCUS UNOAF
D-ZOOM X10
USCITA ESCI
3-17
I
3-16
PROG POSIZIONE
Da Position Set... premere [ENTER] per entrare nella
schermata ORR/VERT, PROG ZOOM/FUOCO ed
impostare la collocazione ORR/VERT e ZOOM/FUOCO,
quindi premere [ENTER] per tornare al men superiore.
PROG VIDEO
Questa funzione serve per impostare lo schermo per ciascuna funzione PRESET. Fare
riferimento alla spiegazione fornita alla voce PROG VIDEO.
ID PRESET
la funzione di identificazione per ciascuna funzione
PRESET.
Pu essere impostata con un massimo di 12 caratteri,
utilizzando i pulsanti Left, Right, Up, Down.
Lidentificativo pu essere impostato dal sottomen di
POSIZIONE...
SCANSIONE
Questa funzione imposta il movimento o non-
movimento in relazione alla scansione delle immagini.
Quando impostata su ON consente la scansione in
movimento, mentre su OFF, senza movimento.
TEMPO DI SCAN
Questa funzione imposta il TEMPO DI SCAN rispetto alla collocazione predefinita dalla
funzione SCAN in movimento. Il TEMPO DI SCAN essere compreso tra 1 ~ 60 secondi.
USCITA
ESCI: Non salva le informazioni selezionate e ritorna al men superiore.
SALVA: Salva le informazioni selezionate e ritorna al men superiore.
ELIMINA: Cancella le informazioni selezionate e ripristina le funzioni di DEFAULT, per
poi tornare al men superiore.
PRESET
Sono disponibili ben 128 funzioni predefinite, tra cui una serie di posizioni PAN/TILT e
Zoom/Focus, nonch impostazioni relative alle condizioni e al monitoraggio dello
schermo (0 ~ 127).
Tra le 128 funzioni PRESET figurano: PRESET 0: POS INIZIALE, PRESET 1:
ALLARME1, PRESET 2: ALLARME2, PRESET 3: ALLARME 3, PRESET 4:
ALLARME4, PRESET 5: impostazione PRESET speciale, corrispondente alla funzione
MOTION.
premere
[Enter]
premere
[Enter]
* * MAIN MENU * *
CAMERA...
PROG VIDEO...
PRESET...
MODO AUTO...
PROG ALLARMI...
ALTRA PROG...
(PRESET MAPPA)
0 H 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29
30 31 RET
ID:PRESET 0
PRESET NO. 0
PROG POSIZIONE ...
PROG VIDEO OFF
ID PRESET ON...
SCANSIONE ON
TEMPO DI SCAN 2 S
USCITA ESCI
PRESET NO. 0
PROG POSIZIONE ...
PROG VIDEO OFF
ID PRESET ON...
SCANSIONE ON
TEMPO DI SCAN 2 S
USCITA ESCI
ID PRESET NO.0
Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
: ! - + * ( ) /
SP SP
POSIZIONE...
RET
PRESET.0....
PRESET NO.0
PROG ORR/VERT
PROG ZOOM/FUOCO
3-19
I
3-18
PROG FINE!
FINE PROG
Da FINE PROG, premendo [ENTER], si accede alla
schermata dellimpostazione FINE PROG. Regolare la
collocazione ORR/VERT e premere [ENTER] per
tornare al men superiore.
DIREZIONE
Impostare la direzione del movimento INIZIALE-FINALE (collocazione PAN standard).
"destra " : "sinistra " :
CONTINUA
Si tratta di una rotazione di 360 gradi che si ferma soltanto per il TEMPORIZZAZIONE
(interruzione rotazione) nelle posizioni INIZIALE ed FINALE. La funzione pu essere
impostata su ON oppure su OFF.
VELOCIT
Si tratta di una funzione che regola la velocit. Pu essere impostata da STEP 1 a STEP
64.
TEMPO DI SCAN
Questa funzione regola la durata della fase in cui la rotazione si arresta sulle posizioni
INIZIALE ed FINALE.
PROG INIZIO!
MODO AUTO
Le funzioni AUTO PAN e PERCORSO sono in MODO AUTO.
AUTO PAN
Dopo aver selezionato le collocazioni dei due punti (ORR/VERT) di avvio (START) e
fine (END), si continua fino ad impostare la velocit (SPEED).
INIZIO PROG
Da INIZIO PROG..., premendo [ENTER], si accede
alla schermata dellimpostazione INIZIO PROG. Dopo
aver selezionato le collocazioni ORR/VERT, premere
nuovamente [ENTER] per ritornare al men superiore.
premere
[Enter]
premere
[Enter]
* * MAIN MENU * *
CAMERA...
PROG VIDEO...
PRESET...
MODO AUTO...
PROG ALLARMI...
ALTRA PROG...
(MODO AUTO)
AUTO PAN ...
PROG PERCORSO 1...
RET
AUTO PAN
INIZIO PROG ...
FINE PROG ...
DIREZIONE SINISTRA
CONTINUA OFF
VELOCITA STEP20
TEMPO DI SCAN 2 S
USCITA ESCI
3-21
I
3-20
PERCORSO
Si tratta di una funzione di replay che consente di impostare le funzioni manuali come
ORR, VERT, ZOOM e FUOCO in 30 secondi.
Possono esserci 3 pattern. Scegliere 1, 2 o 3 con il pulsante Left o Right del
PROG PERCORSO, quindi premere [ENTER] per accedere alla finestra per
limpostazione del PERCORSO.
PROG PERCORSO 1 scomparir per 30 secondi, durante i quali memorizzer i
movimenti manuali; dopo 30 secondi, si ritorner al men superiore.
Se desiderate terminare la procedura di impostazione prima dello scadere dei 30
secondi, premete [ENTER].
premere
[Enter]
premere
[Enter]
* * MAIN MENU * *
CAMERA...
PROG VIDEO...
PRESET...
MODO AUTO...
PROG ALLARMI...
ALTRA PROG...
(MODO AUTO)
AUTO PAN ...
PROG PERCORSO 1...
RET
PROG PERCORSO1
ALLARMI IN
Questo comando imposta il TIPO di input su NO (Aperto
Normale), NC (Normal Close, chiuso normale), oppure su
OFF, a seconda delle caratteristiche del SENSORE
collegato.
premere
[Enter]
* * MAIN MENU * *
CAMERA...
PROG VIDEO...
PRESET...
MODO AUTO...
PROG ALLARMI...
ALTRA PROG...
PROG ALLARMI
Questa funzione comprende 4 INPUT DI ALLARMI e 3 OUTPUT DI ALLARMI. Il sistema pu
riconoscere un input di ALLARMEI attraverso i SENSORI esterni, funziona attraverso la
funzione PRESET o PERCORSO ed emette i segnali output di ALLARMI OUT.
Il sistema riconosce altres il segnale input di ALLARMI quale segnale di ALLARMI quando la
sollecitazione prosegue per oltre 150 m alla volta e il tempo di ogni movimento di ALLARMI
stabilito in base alla corrispondenza con il TEMPO DI SCAN relativo alla funzione PRESET e
PERCORSO attivata.
ALLARMI PRIORITA
In questo modo si imposta la priorit dei 4 input di ALLARMI
in modo che lALLARMI possa operare in base alla priorit.
Nellimpostazione predefinita, la priorit assegnata ad
ALLARMI1: 1, ALLARMI2: 2, ALLARMI3: 3, ALLARMI4: 4.
Se lallarme si attiva con questo tipo di priorit, funzioner
come da modalit DEFAULT. Quando lallarme in funzione,
non per in grado di rilevare la funzione ACTIVITY.
(PROGALLARMI)
PROGALLARMI PRORITA...
PROGALLARMI IN...
PROGALLARMI OUT...
PROGALLARMI PERCORSO...
CON USCITA AUX...
RET
ALLARMI PRIORITA
ALLARMI1 1
ALLARMI2 2
ALLARMI3 3
ALLARMI4 4
USCITA ESCI
ALLARMI IN
ALLARMI1 NO
ALLARMI2 NC
ALLARMI3 NO
ALLARMI4 NC
USCITA ESCI
TEMPO IMPOSTATO PER IL RITORNO ALLA PAGINA PRINCIPALE:
OFF: RIT POS INIZ cancellazione delle funzioni
OFF 1 MIN 2 MIN 3 MIN ~ 60MIN ~12ORA
3-23
I
3-22
ALLARMI OUT
Ad ogni input di ALLARMI corrisponde uno dei 3 ALLARMI
OUT.
Limpostazione OFF del menu SETUP non attiva il PERCORSO, il che significa 1
PERCORSO 1, 2 PERCORSO 2, 3 PERCORSO 3, HALF1 movimento continuo
di PERCORSO 1 + PERCORSO 2, HALF 2 movimento continuo di PERCORSO 2 +
PERCORSO 3 e PIENO movimento continuo di PERCORSO
1+PERCORSO2+PERCORSO3.
CON USCITA AUX
Questa funzione imposta lattivazione di ALLARMI OUT per la
rilevazione di movimento, in modo che tale comando prosegua
o si azioni solo quando lALLARMI in funzione. Se
impostato su OFF,
il movimento ALLARMI OUT sar operativo solo quando
lALLARMI in funzione.
("BASSO" attivo). Se impostato su ON, ALLARMI OUT
funzioner sempre, indipendentemente dallo stato
dellALLARMI.
ALLARMI PERCORSO
Questa funzione imposta i movimenti PERCORSO quando
rilevato un input di ALLARMI.
Quando si ha un input di ALLARMI, la procedura
corrisponder allo schema seguente: ALLARMI 1 d input a
PRESET 1; ALLARMI 2 d input a PRESET 2; ALLARMI 3
d input a PRESET 3; ALLARMI 4 d input PRESET 4, e
ACTIVITY d input a PRESET 5.
Quando lALLARMI in funzione, rimarr sulla posizione
PRESET corrispondente allALLARMI per la durata del
TEMPO DI SCAN, mentre lALLARMI connesso al
PERCORSO continuer ad eseguire i movimenti di
PERCORSO.
AUTO 180
Quando il Tilt in azione con Joystick fino a 90, il PAN della telecamera ruota
automaticamente di 180, mostrando il retro dellarea Tilt. Leffetto quello di
unestensione a 180 dellarea del movimento di Tilt.
POS INIZIALE
Come POS INIZIALE possibile selezionare una delle posizioni preimpostate,
numerate da 0 a 127.
ALTRA PROG
AC(AUTO-CALIBRAZIONE)
Questa funzione attiva o disattiva la funzione di AUTO-CALIBRAZIONE.
SCC-C641(P) supporta la funzione CALIBRAZIONE automatica per aumentaer la
precisione dell'obiettivo e del PAN/TILT. Pu mettere OFF/6Ora/12Ora/18Ora/24Ora.
Senza linput della chiave delutente per il tempo desiderato dal utente. A.C. sar
apparire sullo schermo mentre inizialando LENS e PAN/TILT.
P/T PROPORZIONALE
Questa funzione controlla la velocit PAN/TILT dell'ingrandimento ZOOM durante
l'operzione manuale di PAN/TILT. Se si imposta il P/T proporzio-nale su ON, la velocit
PAN/TILT aumenter nella modalit ZOOM WIDE e diminuir nella modalit ZOOM
TELE.
PTI POS INIZ
Quando non sono stati inseriti COMANDI per un certo periodo di tempo, la telecamera
torna automaticamente alla INIZIALE.
Nel menu POS INIZIALE possibile assegnare la posizione INIZIALE.
ALLARMI OUT
ALLARMI1 1
ALLARMI2 2
ALLARMI3 3
ALLARMI4 1
ACTIVITY 2
USCITA ESCI
ALLARMI PERCORSO
ALLARMI1 HALF1
ALLARMI2 HALF1
ALLARMI3 PIENO
ALLARMI4 PIENO
ACTIVITY 2
USCITA ESCI
CON USCITA AUX
OUT1 ON
OUT2 ON
OUT3 ON
USCITA ESCI
3-25
I
3-24
CAM RESET
Il comando CAM RESET azzera tutte le modifiche apportate e ripristina le impostazioni
predefinite in fabbrica.
Quando si seleziona CAM RESET, viene visualizzato il messaggio CAMERA
RESET?. Selezionare "ANNULLA" per ritornare al display del menu dimpostazione,
oppure selezionare OK per ripristinare le impostazioni predefinite in fabbrica.
G Procedere con cautela quando si eseguono le operazioni CAM RESET, in quanto
vengono eliminati tutti i valori impostati.
Specifiche di prodotto
SCC-641
Contenuto
- Telecamera Combi Dome con obiettivo focale variabile
- AC 24 10% (60Hz 0.3Hz)
- 18W
- Sistema standard colore NTSC
- 1/4 inch IT CCD
- 768(H) x 494(V)
- 525 linee, 2:1 interlace
- Orizzontale: 15,734 Hz(INT) / 15,750 Hz(L/L)
Verticale : 59,94 Hz(INT) / 60 Hz(L/L)
- INT/LINE LOCK
- 480 Linee TV
- 52 dB (AGC OFF)
- 0.3 Lux (Senso Sopra X4)
(0.01 Lux)
- ATW/ AWC/ MODALIT MANUALE
- uscita video composito : 1.0 Vp-p 75 ohms/BNC
- corpo singolo: 22x lente Zoom
- Lente focale: da 3.6 a 79.2 mm
- Apertura: F1.6 (Wide), F3.8 (Tele)
- Auto focus
- gamma PAN: 360 continua
- Velocit PAN predefinita: massimo 240 al secondo
- Velocit PAN manuale: 0.8 ~ 90 al secondo (64 Step)
- gamma TILT : 0 ~ 90
- Velocit predefinita TILT: massimo 150 al secondo
- Velocit TILT manuale: 0.8 ~ 45 al secondo (64 Step)
- Tele/Wide (ZOOM); Vicino/ Lontano(FOCUS);
Apertura/Chiusura Iris; Pan/ Tilt
- Input di allarme: 4 input (5mA Sink)
- Output di allarme: 3 OUT (tipo Open Collector: 2,
24 V corrente continua, 40 mA Massimo; Relay: 1,
NO, NC, COM 2A 30V in corrente continua, 0.5A
125 V in corrente alternata Massimo)
- -10C ~ +50C (14F ~ 122F)
- ~90%
- Calotta (DOME): 147 (),
Sagoma: 159.5( ) x 176(H), Adattatore: 23.5 (H)mm
- 2Kg
NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Funzione
Tipologia di prodotto
Alimentazione
Consumo di energia
Tipologia di trasmissione
Dispositivo immagine
Pixel effettivi
Sistema di scansione
Frequenza della
Sincronizzazione
Risoluzione
Rapporto segnale/ rumore (S/N)
Minima illuminazione
Temperatura di colore
Uscita video
Obiettivo
PAN Function
TILT Function
CONTROLLO A DISTANZA
ALLARMI
Temperatura di funzionamento
Umidit di funzionamento
SIZE
Peso
3-27
I
3-26
Avvertenze
Il copyright del manuale di propriet di Samsung Electronics
Co., Ltd.
Il manuale non pu essere riprodotto elettronicamente,
meccanicamente, su supporto audio o con qualsiasi altro
metodo senza lautorizzazione scritta di Samsung Electronics.
Il presente manuale verr modificato in base ai miglioramenti
apportati al prodotto.
Specifiche di prodotto
SCC-641P
Contenuto
- Telecamera Combi Dome con obiettivo focale variabile
- AC 24 10% (50Hz 0.3Hz)
- 18W
- Sistema standard colore PAL
- 1/4 inch IT CCD
- 752(H) x 582(V)
- 625 linee, 2:1 interlace
- Orizzontale: 15,625 Hz(INT) / 15,625 Hz(L/L)
Verticale : 50 Hz(INT) / 50 Hz(L/L)
- INT/LINE LOCK
- 480 Linee TV
- 52 dB (AGC OFF)
- 0.3 Lux (Senso Sopra X4)
(0.01 Lux)
- ATW/ AWC/ MODALIT MANUALE
- uscita video composito : 1.0 Vp-p 75 ohms/BNC
- corpo singolo: 22x lente Zoom
- Lente focale: da 3.6 a 79.2 mm
- Apertura: F1.6 (Wide), F3.8 (Tele)
- Auto focus
- gamma PAN: 360 continua
- Velocit PAN predefinita: massimo 240 al secondo
- Velocit PAN manuale: 0.8 ~ 90 al secondo (64 Step)
- gamma TILT : 0 ~ 90
- Velocit predefinita TILT: massimo 150 al secondo
- Velocit TILT manuale: 0.8 ~ 45 al secondo (64 Step)
- Tele/Wide (ZOOM); Vicino/ Lontano(FUOCO);
Apertura/Chiusura Iris; Pan/ Tilt
- Input di allarme: 4 input (5mA Sink)
- Output di allarme: 3 OUT (tipo Open Collector: 2,
24 V corrente continua, 40 mA Massimo; Relay: 1,
NO, NC, COM 2A 30V in corrente continua, 0.5A
125 V in corrente alternata Massimo)
- -10C ~ +50C (14F ~ 122F)
- ~90%
- Calotta (DOME): 147 (),
Sagoma: 159.5() x 176(H), Adattatore: 23.5 (H)mm
- 2Kg
NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Funzione
Tipologia di prodotto
Alimentazione
Consumo di energia
Tipologia di trasmissione
Dispositivo immagine
Pixel effettivi
Sistema di scansione
Frequenza della
Sincronizzazione
Risoluzione
Rapporto segnale/ rumore (S/N)
Minima illuminazione
Temperatura di colore
Uscita video
Obiettivo
PAN Function
TILT Function
CONTROLLO A DISTANZA
ALLARMI
Temperatura di funzionamento
Umidit di funzionamento
SIZE
Peso

1d109fa3a4f5c9b715c5214ef56168c6

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1d109fa3a4f5c9b715c5214ef56168c6

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Part : AB68-00393A(02)

die [links, rechts, oben,

die [links, rechts, oben,

Utilisez les clefs

Utilisez les clefs

Use las teclas

Use las teclas

You might also like